WO2016121194A1 - Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imagine element and image display device - Google Patents

Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imagine element and image display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016121194A1
WO2016121194A1 PCT/JP2015/081961 JP2015081961W WO2016121194A1 WO 2016121194 A1 WO2016121194 A1 WO 2016121194A1 JP 2015081961 W JP2015081961 W JP 2015081961W WO 2016121194 A1 WO2016121194 A1 WO 2016121194A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
dye
color filter
general formula
anion
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2015/081961
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
陽祐 村上
貴規 田口
純一 伊藤
宏明 出井
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2016571779A priority Critical patent/JP6543275B2/en
Priority to KR1020177013445A priority patent/KR102018516B1/en
Publication of WO2016121194A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016121194A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B11/00Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B11/00Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes
    • C09B11/04Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes derived from triarylmethanes, i.e. central C-atom is substituted by amino, cyano, alkyl
    • C09B11/10Amino derivatives of triarylmethanes
    • C09B11/24Phthaleins containing amino groups ; Phthalanes; Fluoranes; Phthalides; Rhodamine dyes; Phthaleins having heterocyclic aryl rings; Lactone or lactame forms of triarylmethane dyes
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F2/00Processes of polymerisation
    • C08F2/44Polymerisation in the presence of compounding ingredients, e.g. plasticisers, dyestuffs, fillers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B11/00Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes
    • C09B11/04Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes derived from triarylmethanes, i.e. central C-atom is substituted by amino, cyano, alkyl
    • C09B11/10Amino derivatives of triarylmethanes
    • C09B11/12Amino derivatives of triarylmethanes without any OH group bound to an aryl nucleus
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B11/00Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes
    • C09B11/28Pyronines ; Xanthon, thioxanthon, selenoxanthan, telluroxanthon dyes
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B69/00Dyes not provided for by a single group of this subclass
    • C09B69/10Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B69/00Dyes not provided for by a single group of this subclass
    • C09B69/10Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds
    • C09B69/103Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds containing a diaryl- or triarylmethane dye
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/0005Production of optical devices or components in so far as characterised by the lithographic processes or materials used therefor
    • G03F7/0007Filters, e.g. additive colour filters; Components for display devices
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B33/00Electroluminescent light sources
    • H05B33/12Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K50/00Organic light-emitting devices

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a coloring composition.
  • the present invention also relates to a color filter, a pattern forming method, a color filter manufacturing method, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device.
  • Color filters are used as key devices for solid-state image sensors, liquid crystal display devices, and other optical elements equipped with image sensors such as CCD and CMOS.
  • the color filter normally includes a coloring pattern of three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B), and plays a role of separating transmitted light into the three primary colors.
  • the color filter is manufactured by applying a colored composition onto a base material such as a glass substrate, prebaking at about 100 ° C., forming a pattern after exposure and development, and performing post baking at about 210 ° C.
  • a blue coloring pattern (blue color filter) has a color index (CI) pigment blue 15: 6 and C.I. I. It is manufactured using a coloring composition containing CI Pigment Violet 23.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a dye multimer having a xanthene skeleton, C.I. I. It is disclosed that a color filter is produced using a coloring composition containing CI Pigment Blue 15: 6.
  • Patent Document 2 discloses that a color filter is produced using a coloring composition containing a dye multimer having a triarylmethane skeleton.
  • JP 2012-32754 A US Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0141810
  • the color filter disclosed in Patent Document 1 is a conventional blue color filter, C.I. I. Pigment blue 15: 6 and C.I. I. Although it is superior in spectral characteristics to a color filter formed using a coloring composition containing a colorant composed of a combination with Pigment Violet 23, in recent years, further improvement in the spectral characteristics of the color filter has been demanded. On the other hand, triarylmethane alone tends to have poor spectral characteristics, and the color filter disclosed in Patent Document 2 has been found to have poor spectral characteristics.
  • organic electroluminescence (organic EL) of a light emission source of a liquid crystal display device and organic material of a photoelectric conversion film of an image sensor have been performed. Due to its characteristics, the color filter is required to be manufactured at a low temperature of about 100 ° C. However, it was found that the color filter produced by curing at a low temperature tends to decrease the solvent resistance.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a colored composition capable of forming a cured film such as a color filter having good spectral characteristics and solvent resistance, a color filter, a pattern forming method, a color filter manufacturing method, a solid-state imaging device, and An object is to provide an image display device.
  • a cured film having good spectral characteristics can be formed by using a dye having a xanthene skeleton in combination with a dye having a triarylmethane skeleton. Then, at least one selected from a dye having a xanthene skeleton and a dye having a triarylmethane skeleton is a dye multimer, whereby the colored composition is cured at a low temperature to form a cured film.
  • the present inventors have found that a cured film excellent in solvent resistance can be obtained, and have completed the present invention.
  • the present invention provides the following.
  • a coloring composition comprising a dye A having a triarylmethane skeleton, a dye B having a xanthene skeleton, and a curable compound, wherein at least one selected from the dye A and the dye B is a dye multimer. .
  • the ratio of the number of moles of the triarylmethane skeleton of the dye A to the number of moles of the xanthene skeleton of the dye B is 40:60 to 75:25.
  • At least one selected from Dye A and Dye B has at least one anion selected from a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, and a tetraarylborate anion ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>
  • the coloring composition in any one of. ⁇ 5> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, wherein the dye A has a cation moiety having a triarylmethane skeleton and an anion bonded to the cation moiety via a covalent bond.
  • ⁇ 6> The coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, wherein the dye B has a cation moiety having a xanthene skeleton and an anion bonded to the cation moiety via a covalent bond.
  • ⁇ 7> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, wherein at least one selected from Dye A and Dye B has a group containing a polymerizable unsaturated double bond.
  • ⁇ 8> A color filter using the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>. -The color filter as described in ⁇ 8> for organic electroluminescent elements.
  • ⁇ 10> A step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>, a step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern, A pattern forming method comprising: a step of developing and removing an exposed portion to form a colored pattern; and a step of heating the colored pattern at 50 to 120 ° C.
  • ⁇ 12> A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to ⁇ 8>.
  • ⁇ 13> An image display device having the color filter according to ⁇ 8>.
  • a colored composition capable of forming a cured film such as a color filter having good spectral characteristics and solvent resistance, a color filter, a pattern forming method, a color filter manufacturing method, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display It became possible to provide a device.
  • the description which does not describe substitution and non-substitution includes what does not have a substituent and what has a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • light means actinic rays or radiation.
  • Actinic light or “radiation” means, for example, an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and the like.
  • exposure means not only exposure with far ultraviolet rays such as mercury lamps and excimer lasers, X-rays, EUV light, etc., but also drawing with electron beams, ion beams, etc. unless otherwise specified. Include in exposure.
  • a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • the total solid content refers to the total mass of components excluding the solvent from the total composition of the colored composition.
  • “(meth) acrylate” represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate
  • “(meth) acryl” represents both and / or acrylic and “(meth) acrylic”.
  • Allyl represents both and / or allyl and methallyl
  • “(meth) acryloyl” represents both and / or acryloyl and methacryloyl.
  • the polymerizable compound refers to a compound having a polymerizable functional group, and may be a monomer or a polymer.
  • the polymerizable functional group refers to a group that participates in a polymerization reaction.
  • Me in the chemical formula represents a methyl group
  • Et represents an ethyl group
  • Pr represents a propyl group
  • Bu represents a butyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group.
  • the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in the term if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes.
  • a weight average molecular weight and a number average molecular weight are defined as a polystyrene conversion value by a gel permeation chromatograph (GPC) measurement.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention includes a dye A having a triarylmethane skeleton, a dye B having a xanthene skeleton, and a curable compound, and at least one selected from the dye A and the dye B is a dye multimer. .
  • the colored composition of the present invention can form a cured film such as a color filter having good spectral characteristics and solvent resistance by adopting the above-described configuration. That is, a cured film having good spectral characteristics can be formed by using a pigment having a triarylmethane skeleton and a pigment having a xanthene skeleton in combination.
  • At least one selected from a dye having a triarylmethane skeleton and a dye having a xanthene skeleton is a dye multimer, whereby the colored composition is cured at low temperature to form a cured film.
  • a cured film having excellent solvent resistance can be obtained.
  • the dye A and the dye B are preferably dye multimers.
  • a dye having a triarylmethane skeleton and a dye having a xanthene skeleton have good compatibility and hardly form an association state.
  • the phase separation of the pigments can be suppressed, soaking of the solvent can be suppressed, and excellent solvent resistance can be obtained. Furthermore, by making both into a dye multimer, the dye is more difficult to escape from the film, and color mixing with other colors can be effectively suppressed.
  • the ratio of the number of moles of the triarylmethane skeleton of the dye A to the number of moles of the xanthene skeleton of the dye B is preferably 40:60 to 75:25. If the ratio of both is the said range, the solvent resistance of a cured film can be improved more. In addition, color mixing with other colors can be more effectively suppressed.
  • At least one selected from the dye A and the dye B has an anion selected from a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, and a tetraarylborate anion. preferable.
  • the anion is less susceptible to salt exchange than a chloroanion and can form a cured film having excellent heat resistance.
  • membrane component can be suppressed and it is excellent in the reliability of a film
  • the coloring composition of this invention contains the pigment
  • dye A and Dye B are dye multimers, and both Dye A and Dye B are dye multimers.
  • the dye multimer means a compound having two or more triarylmethane skeletons or xanthene skeletons in one molecule.
  • the dye A preferably has a cation portion having a triarylmethane skeleton and an anion.
  • dye B has a cation part which has a xanthene skeleton, and an anion.
  • the anion may be present outside the cation moiety molecule, but is preferably bound to the cation moiety via a covalent bond.
  • an anion has outside the molecule
  • the anion outside the molecule of the cation moiety is also referred to as a counter anion.
  • the dye A does not substantially contain a xanthene skeleton.
  • dye B does not contain a triarylmethane skeleton substantially.
  • the content of the dye A in the colored composition is preferably 5 to 60% by mass based on the total solid content of the colored composition.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 55% by mass or less, and further preferably 50% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 10% by mass or more, and further preferably 15% by mass or more.
  • the content of the dye B in the coloring composition is preferably 5 to 60% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 55% by mass or less, and further preferably 50% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 7.5% by mass or more, and further preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the total amount of the dye A and the dye B in the total amount of the colorant is preferably 50 to 100% by mass.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 65% by mass or more, and further preferably 70% by mass or more.
  • the ratio of the number of moles of the triarylmethane skeleton of the dye A to the number of moles of the xanthene skeleton of the dye B is preferably 40:60 to 75:25, and more preferably 45:55 to 65:35. If the ratio of both is the said range, the solvent resistance of a cured film can be improved more. In addition, color mixing with other colors can be more effectively suppressed. Furthermore, generation
  • the number of moles of the triarylmethane skeleton of the dye A means the number of moles of the dye A when the dye A is a monomer. Further, when the dye A is a dye multimer, a portion excluding a portion other than the triarylmethane skeleton (for example, DyeI of the general formula (A) described later, DyeIII of the general formula (C) described later, It means the number of moles of D) in the formula (D-1). The same applies to the number of moles of the xanthene skeleton of dye B.
  • At least one selected from Dye A and Dye B includes a group having a polymerizable unsaturated double bond (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “polymerizable group”). More preferably, it contains a group. By setting it as such a structure, it exists in the tendency for solvent resistance to improve more. In addition, color mixing with other colors is less likely to occur. Furthermore, generation
  • Dye A having a triarylmethane skeleton is exemplified by a structure represented by the following formula (TP).
  • Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • Rtp 5 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or NRtp 9 Rtp 10 (Rtp 9 and Rtp 10 represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group).
  • Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 and Rtp 8 represent a substituent.
  • a, b and c each represents an integer of 0 to 4. When a, b and c are 2 or more, Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 and Rtp 8 may be linked to each other to form a ring.
  • X ⁇ represents an anion structure. When X ⁇ is not present, at least one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 7 contains an anion.
  • the dye A is a dye multimer, in the formula (TP), through one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 10 , another part of the dye multimer (preferably L in the general formula (A) described later) 1 or R 2 ) of the general formula (1) described later is preferably bonded, and more preferably bonded to another part of the dye multimer via Rtp 5 .
  • Rtp 1 to Rtp 6 are preferably a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and a phenyl group.
  • Rtp 5 is preferably a hydrogen atom or NRtp 9 Rtp 10 , particularly preferably NRtp 9 Rtp 10 .
  • Rtp 9 and Rtp 10 are preferably a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or a phenyl group.
  • Examples of the substituent represented by Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 and Rtp 8 include the substituent group A described in paragraph Nos. 0042 to 0053 of JP-A-2014-237809.
  • a branched alkyl group, an alkenyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 15 carbon atoms, a carboxyl group or a sulfo group is preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • an alkenyl group, a phenyl group or a carboxyl group is more preferred.
  • Rtp 6 and Rtp 8 are preferably alkyl groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms
  • Rtp 7 is preferably an alkenyl group (particularly a phenyl group in which two adjacent alkenyl groups are linked), a phenyl group or a carboxyl group.
  • a, b or c each independently represents an integer of 0 to 4;
  • a and c are each preferably 0 or 1, more preferably 0.
  • b is preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 2.
  • Rtp 1 to Rtp 7 contains an anion
  • examples of the anion include —SO 3 ⁇ , —COO ⁇ , —PO 4 ⁇ , bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, tris (sulfonyl) methide anion and tetraarylborate anion.
  • bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, tris (sulfonyl) methide anion and tetraarylborate anion are more preferable, and bis (sulfonyl) imide anion and tris (sulfonyl) methide anion are still more preferable.
  • L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include —NR 10 —, —O—, —SO 2 —, an alkylene group which may contain a substituent (for example, a halogen atom and a hydroxyl group, preferably a fluorine atom), and a substituent. It is preferable to represent an arylene group which may contain (for example, a halogen atom or a hydroxyl group, preferably a fluorine atom) or a group consisting of a combination thereof.
  • a group consisting of a combination of —NR 10 —, —SO 2 and an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom a group consisting of a combination of —O— and an arylene group containing a fluorine atom, or —NR 10 — and —SO A group consisting of a combination of 2 and an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom is preferred.
  • R 10 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group containing a fluorine atom is more preferably a perfluoroalkylene group.
  • Specific examples of the alkylene group containing a fluorine atom include a difluoromethylene group, a tetrafluoroethylene group, and a hexafluoropropylene group.
  • the carbon number of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 14, and further preferably 6 to 10.
  • Specific examples of the arylene group containing a fluorine atom include a tetrafluorophenylene group, a hexafluoro-1-naphthylene group, and a hexafluoro-2-naphthylene group.
  • X 1 represents an anion and is selected from —SO 3 ⁇ , —COO ⁇ , —PO 4 ⁇ , a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion and a tetraarylborate anion.
  • Species are preferred, one kind selected from bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, tris (sulfonyl) methide anion and tetraarylborate anion is more preferred, and bis (sulfonyl) imide anion or tris (sulfonyl) methide anion is still more preferred.
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and is preferably a single bond.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 1 include an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, —O—, —S—, or a group composed of a combination thereof.
  • L 2 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—.
  • G represents a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • n1 represents 2 when G is a carbon atom, and represents 1 when G is a nitrogen atom.
  • R 6 represents an alkyl group containing a fluorine atom or an aryl group containing a fluorine atom. When n1 is 2, two R 6 may be the same or different.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group containing a fluorine atom represented by R 6 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6, and still more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the aryl group containing a fluorine atom represented by R 6 is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 14, and still more preferably 6 to 10.
  • the cation is delocalized as follows.
  • Examples of the dye B having a xanthene skeleton include a structure represented by the following formula (J).
  • R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent
  • R 85 each independently represents a monovalent substituent
  • m Represents an integer of 0 to 5.
  • X ⁇ represents a counter anion. When X ⁇ is not present, at least one of R 81 to R 85 contains an anion.
  • the dye B is a dye multimer
  • another part of the dye multimer (preferably L in the general formula (A) to be described later) is bonded via any one of R 81 to R 85 in the formula (J). 1 or R 2 ) of the general formula (1) described later is preferably bonded, and more preferably bonded to another part of the dye multimer via R 85 .
  • R 81 to R 85 in formula (J) examples include substituent group A described in paragraph Nos. 0042 to 0053 of JP-A-2014-237809, the contents of which are incorporated herein. I will do it.
  • R 81 and R 82 in formula (J), R 83 and R 84 , and R 85 in the case where m is 2 or more are each independently bonded to each other to form a 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered saturated ring. Or a 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered unsaturated ring.
  • ring to be formed for example, pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrrolidine ring, piperidine ring, cyclopentene ring, cyclohexene ring, benzene ring, pyridine ring, A pyrazine ring and a pyridazine ring are mentioned, Preferably a benzene ring and a pyridine ring are mentioned.
  • the ring formed is a further substitutable group, it may be substituted with the substituents described for R 81 to R 85 , and when it is substituted with two or more substituents, These substituents may be the same or different.
  • R 82 and R 83 are preferably a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, and R 81 and R 84 are preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group or a phenyl group.
  • R 85 is preferably a halogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a sulfo group, a sulfonamide group, a carboxyl group, or an amide group. The sulfo group, the sulfonamide group, the carboxyl group, More preferred is an amide group.
  • R 85 is preferably bonded to the adjacent part of carbon linked to the xanthene ring.
  • the substituent that the phenyl group of R 81 and R 84 has is particularly preferably a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a sulfo group, a sulfonamide group, or a carboxyl group.
  • R 81 to R 85 contains an anion
  • examples of the anion include the anions described above.
  • the compound having a xanthene skeleton represented by the formula (J) can be synthesized by a method described in the literature. Specifically, the methods described in Tetrahedron Letters, 2003, vol. 44, No. 23, pages 4355-4360, Tetrahedron, 2005, vol. 61, No. 12, pages 3097-3106, etc. Can be applied.
  • the cation is delocalized as follows.
  • the counter anion is not particularly limited, but may be a non-nucleophilic anion from the viewpoint of heat resistance. preferable.
  • the non-nucleophilic anion known non-nucleophilic anions described in JP-A-2007-310315, paragraph No. 0075 and the like are preferable.
  • the non-nucleophilic property means a property that does not nucleophilic attack the dye by heating.
  • sulfonate anion carboxylate anion, sulfonylimide anion, bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, carboxylate anion, tetra aryl volley de anion, -CON - CO -, - CON - SO 2 ⁇ , BF 4 ⁇ , PF 6 ⁇ , SbF 6 ⁇ , B ⁇ (CN) 3 OCH 3 is preferable.
  • the counter anion is more preferably a non-nucleophilic anion having a structure represented by the following (AN-1) to (AN-5).
  • X 1 and X 2 each independently represent a fluorine atom or a C 1-10 alkyl group having a fluorine atom.
  • X 1 and X 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • X 1 and X 2 each independently represent a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having a fluorine atom, preferably a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having a fluorine atom, More preferred is a perfluoroalkyl group of ⁇ 10, more preferred is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and a trifluoromethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • X 3 , X 4 and X 5 each independently represent a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • X 3 , X 4 and X 5 are each independently the same as X 1 and X 2 , and the preferred range is also the same.
  • X 6 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • X 6 is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, More preferably, it is a 4 perfluoroalkyl group.
  • X 7 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • X 7 is preferably a perfluoroalkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably a perfluoroalkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 each independently represents an aryl group.
  • Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 are each independently preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and further an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms preferable.
  • the aryl group represented by Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 may have a substituent.
  • a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, a carbonyl group, a carbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfonamide group, a nitro group and the like can be mentioned, and a halogen atom and an alkyl group are preferable, A fluorine atom and an alkyl group are more preferable, and a fluorine atom and a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms are more preferable.
  • Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 are each independently more preferably a phenyl group having a halogen atom and / or an alkyl group having a halogen atom, and a phenyl group having a fluorine atom and / or an alkyl group having fluorine. Is more preferable.
  • the non-nucleophilic counter anion is also —B (CN) n1 (OR a ) 4-n1 (R a represents an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and n1 represents It is preferably an integer of 1 to 4.
  • Ra as the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R a as the aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group.
  • n1 is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 to 2.
  • the non-nucleophilic counter anion is further —PF 6 R P (6-n2) ⁇ (R P represents a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and n2 represents an integer of 1 to 6) It is preferable that R P is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and further preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. n2 is preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 or 2.
  • the mass per molecule of the non-nucleophilic counter anion is preferably 100 to 1,000, and more preferably 200 to 500. Specific examples of the non-nucleophilic counter anion are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the triarylmethane skeleton and the xanthene skeleton are collectively referred to as a dye skeleton.
  • Specific examples of the case where the dye having a triarylmethane skeleton (Dye A) is a multimer include compounds described in JP-A-2015-83652. This content is incorporated herein.
  • the method for producing the dye multimer is not particularly limited, and an appropriate method may be selected as appropriate. For example, it can be produced by the method described in JP-A-2015-83652.
  • the dye multimer includes a dye multimer (also referred to as a dye multimer (A)) having a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A) described later, and a repeat represented by the general formula (B) described later.
  • a dye multimer having a unit also referred to as a dye multimer (B)
  • a dye multimer having a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (C) also referred to as a dye multimer (C)
  • the dye multimer represented by (D) (also referred to as dye multimer (D)) is preferred.
  • the dye multimer (A), the dye multimer (C), and the dye multimer (D) are more preferable, and the dye multimer (A) and the dye multimer ( D) is particularly preferred.
  • the dye multimer will be described in detail.
  • the dye multimer (A) includes a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (A).
  • the ratio of the repeating unit represented by the following general formula (A) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass of the total repeating units constituting the dye multimer.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 20% by mass or more, further preferably 30% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 50% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 95% by mass or less.
  • X 1 represents a linking group formed by polymerization
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • DyeI represents a group having a triarylmethane skeleton or a xanthene skeleton.
  • X 1 represents a linking group formed by polymerization. That is, X 1 represents the main chain of the repeating unit. X 1 is not limited as long as it is a linking group formed from a known polymerizable monomer.
  • Linking groups represented by the following (XX-1) to (XX-30) are exemplified, and linking groups represented by the following (XX-1) to (XX-24) are preferred, and (XX-1), ( XX-2), (XX-10) to (XX-17), (XX-18), (XX-19) and (XX-24), more preferably selected from (XX-1), (XX More preferably selected from (XX-2), (XX-10) to (XX-17) and (XX-24), selected from (XX-1), (XX-2) and (XX-11) It is particularly preferred that In the formula, it is linked to L 1 at the site indicated by *. Me represents a methyl group.
  • R in (XX-18) and (XX-19) represents a hydrogen atom
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH ⁇ CH—, —O—, —S—, —C ( ⁇ O )-, -CO 2- , -NR-, -CONR-, -O 2 C-, -SO-, -SO 2 -and a linking group formed by linking two or more of these, (L- The group represented by 1) is mentioned.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • formula (L-1) it is linked to X 1 of formula (A) at the site indicated by * 1, and is linked to DyeI of formula (A) at the site indicated by * 2.
  • L 11 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, —O—, —CO—, —S—, —SO 2 —, —NR A R B — or Examples include groups composed of these combinations.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the arylene group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • R A and R B each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and R A and R B are bonded to each other to form a ring. Also good.
  • L 12 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—.
  • L 13 represents a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include the groups described for L 11 , an arylene group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably a phenylene group), —O—, —CO—, —S—, —NR A R B -Or a group consisting of a combination thereof is preferred, and a group consisting of a combination of a phenylene group, -O- and -CO- is more preferred.
  • G represents a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • n2 represents 1 when G is a carbon atom, and represents 0 when G is a nitrogen atom.
  • R 7A represents an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom or an arylene group containing a fluorine atom.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the carbon number of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 14, and further preferably 6 to 10.
  • R 7B represents an alkyl group containing a fluorine atom or an aryl group containing a fluorine atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the dye multimer containing the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A) includes (1) a method of synthesizing a monomer having a dye skeleton by addition polymerization, and (2) an isocyanate group, an acid anhydride group, an epoxy group or the like It can be synthesized by a method in which a polymer having a reactive functional group is reacted with a dye having a functional group (hydroxyl group, primary or secondary amino group, carboxyl group, etc.) capable of reacting with a highly reactive group.
  • Known addition polymerizations (radical polymerization, anionic polymerization, and cationic polymerization) can be applied to the addition polymerization.
  • the dye multimer having the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A) is a radical polymer obtained by radical polymerization using a dye monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond from the viewpoint of heat resistance. It is preferable.
  • the dye multimer in the present invention may contain other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A).
  • Other repeating units may contain a functional group such as a polymerizable group or an acid group. It does not have to contain a functional group.
  • the dye multimer preferably has at least one selected from a repeating unit having an acid group and a repeating unit having a polymerizable group, and more preferably includes a repeating unit having an acid group.
  • Examples of the polymerizable group include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group and a (meth) acryloyloxy group, and a (meth) acryloyl group and a (meth) acryloyloxy group are preferable.
  • the ratio of the repeating unit having a polymerizable group is preferably 0 to 50% by mass of all repeating units constituting the dye multimer.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 1% by mass or more, and still more preferably 3% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 35% by mass or less, and still more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • the acid group examples include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group. Only one type of acid group may be included, or two or more types of acid groups may be included.
  • the ratio of the repeating unit having an acid group is preferably 0 to 50% by mass of all repeating units constituting the dye multimer.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 1% by mass or more, and still more preferably 3% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 35% by mass or less, and still more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • Other functional groups include groups consisting of repeating 2 to 20 unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains, development promoting groups such as lactones, acid anhydrides, amides, cyano groups, long chain and cyclic alkyl groups, aralkyl groups, aryls Groups, polyalkylene oxide groups, hydroxyl groups, maleimide groups, amino group and other hydrophilicity-adjusting groups, and the like, which can be appropriately introduced.
  • the number of repeating alkyleneoxy chains is preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 15, and even more preferably 2 to 10.
  • One alkyleneoxy chain is represented by — (CH 2 ) n O—, where n is an integer, n is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 2 or 3.
  • the dye multimer (B) includes a cation having a triarylmethane skeleton or a xanthene skeleton and a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (B).
  • the ratio of the repeating unit represented by the following general formula (B) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass of the total repeating units constituting the dye multimer.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 20% by mass or more, further preferably 30% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 50% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 95% by mass or less.
  • X 2 represents a linking group formed by polymerization
  • L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Z represents an anion.
  • X 2 has the same meaning as X 1 in formula (A), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include a hydrocarbon group, —NH—, —CO—, —COO—, a divalent group containing a dye skeleton, etc., and an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, An arylene group having 20 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkylcarbonyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • These divalent linking groups are preferably substituted with an electron-withdrawing group.
  • the electron-withdrawing group include a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom), nitro group, cyano group, Examples thereof include a halogenated alkyl group (for example, a trifluoromethyl group) and a halogenated aryl group.
  • Z represents an anion.
  • the anion is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include —SO 3 ⁇ , —COO ⁇ , —PO 4 ⁇ , bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, and tetraarylborate anion.
  • An anion represented by the general formula (Z-1), an anion represented by the general formula (Z-2), and an anion represented by the following general formula (Z-3) are also preferable.
  • Z is preferably an anion represented by general formulas (Z-1) to (Z-3), a group represented by general formula (2-1), a fluorinated alkylsulfonimide group (general formula (2- 2), Y 2 represents a nitrogen atom, A 2 represents a fluorinated alkylsulfonyl group), or a fluorinated alkyl sulfonemethide group (in general formula (2-2), Y 2 represents a carbon atom, and A 2 represents a fluorine atom. Each of which represents an alkylsulfonyl group).
  • Y 1 represents a fluorinated alkylene group.
  • the fluorinated alkylene group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Moreover, it is more preferably a perfluoroalkylene group.
  • Y 2 represents an anion composed of a boron atom, a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, or a phosphorus atom.
  • n is 3
  • a 2 represents a halogen atom, a cyano group, an alkyl group containing at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group, or at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group.
  • An aryl group is preferred.
  • Y 2 is a carbon atom
  • n is 2 and A 2 is a halogen atom, a cyano group, an alkyl group containing at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group, an aryl containing at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group
  • An alkylsulfonyl group which may contain at least one of a group, a fluorine atom and a cyano group, or an arylsulfonyl group which may contain at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group is preferred.
  • Two A 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • Y 2 is a nitrogen atom
  • n is 1
  • a 2 is an alkyl group containing at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group, an aryl group containing at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group, a fluorine atom and a cyano group
  • An alkylsulfonyl group which may contain at least one group or an arylsulfonyl group which may contain at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group is preferable.
  • Y 2 is a phosphorus atom
  • n is 1 or 3
  • a 2 is an alkyl group containing at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group, an aryl group containing at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group, a fluorine atom
  • an alkylsulfonyl group which may contain at least one of cyano groups, or an arylsulfonyl group which may contain at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group is preferable.
  • the plurality of A 2 may be the same or different.
  • the ratio of the fluorine atom contained in Z to the total number of atoms constituting Z is preferably 5 to 80%, preferably 10 to 70% is more preferable.
  • R 1 to R 4 are preferably each independently a cyano group or a fluorinated alkyl group.
  • repeating unit represented by the general formula (B) include the structures described in paragraph numbers 0162 to 0166 in JP-A-2014-199436.
  • the dye multimer (B) may contain other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) in addition to the repeating unit represented by the general formula (B). Moreover, the repeating unit represented by general formula (A) mentioned above and the repeating unit represented by general formula (C) mentioned later may further be included.
  • the dye multimer (C) includes a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (C).
  • the ratio of the repeating unit represented by the following general formula (C) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass of the total repeating units constituting the dye multimer.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 20% by mass or more, further preferably 30% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 50% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 95% by mass or less.
  • L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • DyeIII represents a group having a triarylmethane skeleton or a xanthene skeleton.
  • m represents 0 or 1;
  • L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 3 include an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH ⁇ CH—, —O—, and —S—. , —C ( ⁇ O) —, —CO 2 —, —NR—, —CONR—, —O 2 C—, —SO—, —SO 2 — and a linking group formed by linking two or more thereof.
  • m represents 0 or 1, but is preferably 1.
  • repeating unit represented by the general formula (C) include the following.
  • the dye multimer (C) may contain other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) in addition to the repeating unit represented by the general formula (C).
  • the dye multimer (C) can be synthesized by sequential polymerization.
  • Sequential polymerization means polyaddition (for example, reaction of diisocyanate compound and diol, reaction of diepoxy compound and dicarboxylic acid, reaction of tetracarboxylic dianhydride and diol, etc.) and polycondensation (for example, dicarboxylic acid).
  • a diol, a reaction of a dicarboxylic acid and a diamine, and the like are particularly preferable because the reaction conditions can be moderated and the dye skeleton is not decomposed.
  • Known reaction conditions can be applied to the sequential polymerization.
  • the dye multimer (D) is represented by the general formula (D).
  • L 4 represents an n-valent linking group.
  • n represents an integer of 2 to 20.
  • DyeIV represents a polymer chain including a group having a triarylmethane skeleton or a xanthene skeleton, or a repeating unit having a triarylmethane skeleton or a xanthene skeleton.
  • n is preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 14, still more preferably 2 to 8, particularly preferably 2 to 7, and most preferably 2 to 6.
  • dye is an integer
  • the coloring composition of this invention may contain multiple things from which n differs as a pigment
  • n in one dye preferably represents an integer of 2 to 20.
  • the dye multimer (D) is a mixture containing 50% by mass of the dye a1 in which n is 2 in the general formula (D) and 50% by mass of the dye a2 in which n is 1, the average value of n
  • the dye a1 contained in this mixture corresponds to the dye multimer (D) because n satisfies an integer of 2 to 20.
  • the average value of n is preferably a number of 2 to 20.
  • L 4 represents an n-valent linking group.
  • n-valent linking groups include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and 0 To 20 sulfur atoms are included, which may be unsubstituted or further substituted.
  • Specific examples of the n-valent linking group include the following structural unit or a group composed of a combination of two or more of the following structural units (which may form a ring structure).
  • n-valent linking groups are shown below. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
  • a linking group described in paragraph Nos. 0071 to 0072 of JP-A-2008-222950 and a linking group described in paragraph No. 0176 of JP-A-2013-029760 are also included.
  • the dye multimer (D) is also preferably represented by the general formula (D1).
  • L 4 represents an n-valent linking group.
  • n represents an integer of 2 to 20.
  • DyeIVa represents a polymer chain including a group having a triarylmethane skeleton or a xanthene skeleton, or a repeating unit having a triarylmethane skeleton or a xanthene skeleton.
  • S represents a sulfur atom.
  • One preferred embodiment of the dye multimer (D) is a structure represented by the following general formula (D-1).
  • R 1 represents a (m + n) -valent linking group
  • P represents a monovalent substituent having a repeating unit
  • D represents a dye skeleton
  • R 2 and L 1 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • m represents an integer of 1 to 13, when m is 1, P represents a monovalent substituent having two or more repeating units
  • the plurality of Ps may be different from each other, the average value of the number of repeating units constituting the plurality of Ps is 2 or more
  • n represents an integer of 2 to 14, when n is 2 or more, the plurality of D may be different from each other
  • m + n represents an integer of 2 to 15.
  • m represents an integer of 1 to 13.
  • m is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 4, and particularly preferably 1 to 3.
  • n represents an integer of 2 to 14.
  • n is preferably 2 to 8, more preferably 2 to 7, particularly preferably 2 to 6, and more preferably 2 to 5.
  • m + n is preferably 2 to 15.
  • M and n in one dye are integers, but in the present invention, a plurality of dye multimers having different m and n in the general formula (D-1) may be included. Therefore, the average value of m and n in the coloring composition of the present invention may not be an integer.
  • m in one dye preferably represents an integer of 1 to 13.
  • the average value of m is 1 to 13, and the average value of n is 2 to 14. preferable.
  • R 1 represents a (m + n) -valent linking group.
  • m + n satisfies 2 to 15.
  • Examples of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, and 1 to 200. Groups consisting of up to 20 hydrogen atoms and 0 to 20 sulfur atoms, which may be unsubstituted or further substituted.
  • Specific examples of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 include the structure described above for L 4 .
  • R 2 and L 1 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. When a plurality of R 2 and L 1 are present, they may be the same or different.
  • Divalent linking groups include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and 0 To 20 sulfur atoms are included, which may be unsubstituted or further substituted.
  • divalent linking group examples include a group constituted by combining two or more of the following structural units or the following structural units.
  • R 2 and L 1 are preferably a group containing —S—, more preferably —S—.
  • P represents a substituent.
  • a monovalent substituent having a repeating unit derived from a vinyl compound is preferable.
  • m Ps may be the same or different.
  • P is preferably a monovalent substituent having 2 to 20 (preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10) repeating units derived from a vinyl compound.
  • the average number of repeating units derived from m P vinyl compounds is 2 to 20 (preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10). It is preferable. According to this aspect, the flatness of the coating film is improved.
  • the average value of the number of repeating units of m P can be obtained by nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR).
  • NMR nuclear magnetic resonance
  • m can be calculated from the peak area ratio of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 and the dye skeleton D, and the peak area ratio of the repeating unit can be calculated by dividing by m. .
  • Examples of the repeating unit constituting P include the other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) described above.
  • the other repeating unit preferably has at least one selected from the above-described repeating unit having an acid group and the repeating unit having a polymerizable group, and more preferably includes a repeating unit having an acid group.
  • the proportion of the repeating unit containing an acid group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 10 to 65 mol%, based on all the repeating units of P.
  • the ratio of the repeating unit having a polymerizable group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 10 to 65 mol%, based on all the repeating units of P. .
  • the color transfer property can be further improved.
  • the dye multimer having the dye skeleton represented by the general formula (D-1) can be synthesized by the following method or the like.
  • Polymer reaction method (2) A method in which a polymer having a carbon-carbon double bond introduced at the terminal and a mercaptan having a dye skeleton are subjected to a Michael addition reaction.
  • P- (Q) n (D-2) P represents an n-valent linking group
  • Q represents a polymer chain containing a repeating unit having a dye skeleton
  • the average value of the number of repeating units of n Q having a dye skeleton is 2 or more
  • n represents an integer of 3 to 10.
  • P represents an n-valent linking group.
  • n-valent linking groups include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and 0 To 20 sulfur atoms are included, which may be unsubstituted or further substituted.
  • the n-valent linking group represented by P includes 1 to 60 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 40 oxygen atoms, 1 to 120 hydrogen atoms, and Groups consisting of 0 to 10 sulfur atoms are preferred.
  • the n-valent linking group represented by P is preferably a linking group derived from a polyhydric alcohol.
  • the dye multimer represented by the general formula (D-2) is preferably represented by the general formula (D-2a).
  • a 1 represents an n-valent linking group
  • B 1 represents a single bond, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —NR—, —O 2 C—, —CO 2 —, —NROC—, or —CONR—
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • C 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • S represents a sulfur atom
  • Q represents a polymer chain containing a repeating unit having a dye skeleton
  • the average value of the number of repeating units of n Q having a dye skeleton is 2 or more
  • n represents an integer of 3 to 10.
  • a 1 represents an n-valent linking group.
  • the n-valent linking group is preferably a group consisting of one or a combination of two or more selected from an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic ring group and a heterocyclic group which may have an oxygen atom in the main chain.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group and an alkenylene group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkylene group is, for example, preferably 1-60, and more preferably 1-30.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkenylene group is, for example, preferably 1-60, and more preferably 1-30.
  • Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group having an oxygen atom in the main chain include groups represented by — (OR x1 ) m — and — (R x1 O) m —.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group having an oxygen atom in the main chain may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the main chain refers to a skeleton portion of a linking group and does not include a substituent.
  • R x1 represents an alkylene group or an alkenylene group.
  • m represents an integer of 1 or more. When m is 2 or more, m R x1 s may be the same or different.
  • the alkylene group represented by R x1 preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the carbon number of the alkenylene group represented by R x1 is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 10, and still more preferably 2 to 5.
  • the alkenylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the aromatic ring group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Examples of the hetero atom contained in the heterocyclic group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom. A nitrogen atom is preferred.
  • the number of heteroatoms is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the n-valent linking group represented by A 1 includes a hydrocarbon group that may have an oxygen atom in the main chain, an aromatic ring group, a heterocyclic group, and a hydrocarbon group that may have an oxygen atom in the main chain; Preferred examples include a combination with an aromatic ring group and a combination of a hydrocarbon group that may have an oxygen atom in the main chain and a heterocyclic group.
  • B 1 is a single bond, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —NR—, Represents —O 2 C—, —CO 2 —, —NROC—, or —CONR—, and represents a single bond, —O—, —CO—, —O 2 C—, —CO 2 —, —NROC—, or —CONR— is preferable.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the alkyl group represented by R preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the aryl group represented by R is preferably 6-30, and more preferably 6-12.
  • R is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • C 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group is preferably an alkylene group, an arylene group or an oxyalkylene group, more preferably an alkylene group or an oxyalkylene group.
  • the alkylene group and oxyalkylene group preferably have 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group and oxyalkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the arylene group is preferably 6 to 30, and more preferably 6 to 12.
  • n-valent linking group represented by P Specific examples of the n-valent linking group represented by P are shown below. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
  • the polymer chain represented by Q represents a polymer chain containing a repeating unit having a dye skeleton, and the average value of the number of repeating units of n Q having a dye skeleton is 2 or more.
  • the n Qs may be the same or different.
  • the polymer chain represented by Q preferably has an average value of 2 to 20 repeating units having a dye skeleton, more preferably 2 to 15 and even more preferably 2 to 10.
  • the average value of the number of repeating units having a dye skeleton can be determined by NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance). Specifically, for example, the number of repeating units in the general formula (D-2) is obtained from the peak area ratio between the n-valent linking group represented by P and the repeating unit of the polymer chain Q. Next, the number of repeating units in the polymer chain Q can be calculated by dividing the value by n.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer chain Q is preferably 2000 to 40000.
  • the polymer chain represented by Q is not particularly defined as long as it contains a dye skeleton, but is a kind selected from (meth) acrylic resins, styrene resins, and (meth) acrylic / styrene resins. Preferably there is.
  • the skeleton structure of the repeating unit having a dye skeleton is not particularly defined, and examples thereof include the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A) described above and the repeating unit represented by the general formula (C) described above. .
  • the total number of repeating units having a dye skeleton in all repeating units constituting the polymer chain Q is preferably 5 to 60 mol%, more preferably 10 to 50 mol%, and 20 to 40 mol%. Further preferred.
  • the polymer chain Q may contain other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) in addition to the repeating unit having the dye skeleton described above.
  • another repeating unit it is preferable to have one or more selected from a repeating unit having an acid group and a repeating unit having a polymerizable group.
  • the ratio of the repeating unit having a polymerizable group is preferably, for example, 5 to 50 mol with respect to 100 mol of all the repeating units of the polymer chain Q. Mole is more preferred.
  • the ratio of the repeating unit having an acid group is preferably, for example, 5 to 50 moles relative to 100 moles of all the repeating units of the polymer chain Q, and 10 to 40 moles. More preferred.
  • the dye multimer represented by the general formula (D-2) is not particularly limited, but has a polyfunctional thiol compound having 3 to 10 thiol groups in one molecule, a dye skeleton and a radical polymerizable group. It can be produced by a method of radical polymerization of a compound (radically polymerizable dye compound).
  • the radical polymerization of the polyfunctional thiol compound and the radical polymerizable dye compound is performed by, for example, dissolving the polyfunctional thiol compound and the radical polymerizable dye compound in an appropriate solvent, adding a radical generator to the solution, The addition can be carried out at a temperature of about 50 ° C. to 100 ° C. (thiol-ene reaction method).
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye multimer is preferably 2000 to 40000.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and further preferably 4000 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 35,000 or less and even more preferably 30000 or less. By satisfy
  • the dye multimer includes a triarylmethane skeleton, that is, when the dye A is a dye multimer
  • the weight average molecular weight of the dye A is preferably 2000 to 40000.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and further preferably 4000 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 35,000 or less and even more preferably 30000 or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the dye B is preferably 2000 to 40000.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and further preferably 4000 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 35,000 or less and even more preferably 30000 or less.
  • dye multimer is a polystyrene conversion value by a gel permeation chromatograph (GPC) measurement, and specifically, it measured by the method as described in the Example mentioned later. Value.
  • the acid value of the dye multimer is preferably 10 mgKOH / g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more, further preferably 27 mgKOH / g or more, and particularly preferably 30 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the upper limit of the acid value is preferably 300 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 180 mgKOH / g or less, still more preferably 130 mgKOH / g or less, and still more preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the ratio [(Mw) / (Mn)] of the weight average molecular weight (Mw) to the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the dye multimer is preferably 1.0 to 3.0, preferably 1.0 to 2. 5 is more preferable, and 1.0 to 2.0 is particularly preferable.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a colorant other than the dye A and the dye B.
  • the other colorant may be either a dye or a pigment.
  • the other colorant may be a dye multimer.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the dye multimer is preferably 2,000 to 50,000, more preferably 3,000 to 30,000, and further preferably 6,000 to 20,000. 1 type may be sufficient as another colorant, and 2 or more types may be sufficient as it.
  • the pigment examples include conventionally known various inorganic pigments or organic pigments. Further, considering that it is preferable to have a high transmittance, whether it is an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment, it is preferable to use a pigment having an average particle size as small as possible, and considering the handling properties, the average particle size of the pigment is 0.01 to 0.1 ⁇ m is preferable, and 0.01 to 0.05 ⁇ m is more preferable.
  • inorganic pigments include metal compounds represented by metal oxides, metal complex salts, and the like.
  • black pigments such as carbon black and titanium black, iron, cobalt, aluminum, cadmium, lead, copper
  • metal oxides such as titanium, magnesium, chromium, zinc and antimony, and composite oxides of the above metals.
  • Examples of the dye include JP-A 64-90403, JP-A 64-91102, JP-A-1-94301, JP-A-6-11614, JP 2592207, and US Pat. No. 4,808,501.
  • dye currently disclosed by 194828 gazette etc. can be used.
  • pyrazole azo compounds When classified as chemical structure, pyrazole azo compounds, pyromethene compounds, anilinoazo compounds, triphenylmethane compounds, anthraquinone compounds, benzylidene compounds, oxonol compounds, pyrazolotriazole azo compounds, pyridone azo compounds, cyanine compounds, phenothiazine compounds, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine compounds, etc. Can be used.
  • a dye multimer may be used as the dye. Examples of the dye multimer include compounds described in JP2011-213925A and JP2013-041097A.
  • the azo dyes described in paragraphs 0084 to 0134 of JP2013-41097A and paragraphs 0029 to 0136 of JP2011-162760A can also be used.
  • the content of the other coloring agent is preferably 1 to 30% by mass with respect to the total amount of the coloring agent.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 25% by mass or less, further preferably 20% by mass or less, and further preferably 15% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3% by mass or more, further preferably 5% by mass or more, and further preferably 7% by mass or more.
  • it can also be set as the aspect which does not contain other coloring agents substantially.
  • 0.1 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the whole quantity of a coloring agent, for example, and 0.05 mass% or less is more preferable, and it is still more preferable not to contain that other coloring agents are not contained substantially.
  • the content of the colorant with respect to the total solid content in the colored composition is preferably 10 to 60% by mass.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 20% by mass or more, and further preferably 30% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 55% by mass or less. If content of a colorant is the range mentioned above, content of components other than a colorant can be raised and developability can be improved more.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a curable compound.
  • a curable compound known compounds that can be cross-linked by radicals, acids, and heat can be used.
  • examples of the curable compound include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether (epoxy, oxetane) group, a methylol group, and the like, and a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferable.
  • the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • the curable compound is preferably a compound polymerizable by radicals, preferably a radical polymerizable compound, and more preferably a radical photopolymerizable compound (hereinafter, the radical polymerizable compound is also referred to as a polymerizable compound).
  • the polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form such as a monomer, a prepolymer, that is, a dimer, a trimer and an oligomer, or a mixture thereof and a multimer thereof.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a monomer.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a 3 to 15 functional (meth) acrylate compound, more preferably a 3 to 6 functional (meth) acrylate compound.
  • the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 3000, and more preferably 200 to 2000.
  • Examples of monomers and prepolymers include unsaturated carboxylic acids (eg, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), esters, amides, and multimers thereof.
  • unsaturated carboxylic acids eg, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
  • esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compounds amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyvalent amine compounds, and multimers thereof.
  • a dehydration condensation reaction product with a functional carboxylic acid is also preferably used.
  • Reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having electrophilic substituents such as isocyanate groups and epoxy groups with monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines and thiols, halogen groups and tosyloxy groups A reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a leaving substituent such as monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines or thiols is also suitable.
  • the polymerizable compound is also preferably a compound having at least one group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond and having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher under normal pressure.
  • compounds described in paragraph 0227 of JP 2013-29760 A and paragraphs 0254 to 0257 of JP 2008-292970 A can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the polymerizable compounds are dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (KAYARAD D-320 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., NK Ester A-DPH-12E (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and structures in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are mediated by ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues (for example, commercially available from Sartomer, SR454, SR499) Is preferred . These oligomer types can also be used.
  • KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • NK ester A-TMMT manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable compound are shown below.
  • the polymerizable compound may have an acid group such as a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, or a phosphoric acid group.
  • an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid is preferable, and a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride is reacted with an unreacted hydroxyl group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound.
  • a polymerizable compound having a group is more preferable, and in this ester, the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and / or dipentaerythritol.
  • Examples of commercially available products include Aronix M-510, Aronix M-520, Aronix TO-2349, and the like as polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • the preferred acid value of the polymerizable compound having an acid group is 0.1 to 40 mgKOH / g, particularly preferably 5 to 30 mgKOH / g. If the acid value of the polymerizable compound is 0.1 mgKOH / g or more, the development and dissolution characteristics are good, and if it is 40 mgKOH / g or less, it is advantageous in production and handling. Furthermore, the photopolymerization performance is good and the curability is excellent.
  • the polymerizable compound is also preferably a compound having a caprolactone structure.
  • the compound having a caprolactone structure is not particularly limited as long as it has a caprolactone structure in the molecule.
  • trimethylolethane, ditrimethylolethane, trimethylolpropane, ditrimethylolpropane, pentaerythritol, dipentaerythritol Mention is made of an ⁇ -caprolactone-modified polyfunctional (meth) acrylate obtained by esterifying (meth) acrylic acid and ⁇ -caprolactone with a polyhydric alcohol such as tripentaerythritol, glycerin, diglycerol, trimethylolmelamine and the like.
  • a polyhydric alcohol such as tripentaerythritol, glycerin, diglycerol, trimethylolmelamine and the like.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • m represents a number of 1 or 2
  • “*” Indicates a bond.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and “*” represents a bond.
  • polymerizable compound a compound represented by the following general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) can also be used.
  • each E independently represents — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O).
  • Each independently represents an integer of 0 to 10
  • each X independently represents a (meth) acryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxyl group.
  • the total of (meth) acryloyl groups is 3 or 4
  • each m independently represents an integer of 0 to 10
  • the total of each m is an integer of 0 to 40 .
  • the total number of (meth) acryloyl groups is 5 or 6
  • each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 10
  • the total of each n is an integer of 0 to 60 .
  • m is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
  • the total of each m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and particularly preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
  • n is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
  • the total of each n is preferably an integer of 3 to 60, more preferably an integer of 3 to 24, and particularly preferably an integer of 6 to 12.
  • — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O) — represents oxygen
  • a form in which the end on the atom side is bonded to X is preferred.
  • the compounds represented by formula (Z-4) or formula (Z-5) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • a form in which all six Xs are acryloyl groups is preferable.
  • the total content of the compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) in the polymerizable compound is preferably 20% by mass or more, and more preferably 50% by mass or more.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) is a conventionally known process, which is a ring-opening addition of ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol. It can be synthesized from a step of bonding a ring-opening skeleton by reaction and a step of introducing a (meth) acryloyl group by reacting, for example, (meth) acryloyl chloride with a terminal hydroxyl group of the ring-opening skeleton. Each step is a well-known step, and a person skilled in the art can easily synthesize a compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5).
  • a pentaerythritol derivative and / or a dipentaerythritol derivative are more preferable.
  • Specific examples include compounds represented by the following formulas (a) to (f) (hereinafter also referred to as “exemplary compounds (a) to (f)”).
  • exemplary compounds (a), (f) b), (e) and (f) are preferred.
  • Examples of commercially available polymerizable compounds represented by the general formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5) include SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains manufactured by Sartomer, Nippon Kayaku Examples thereof include DPCA-60, which is a hexafunctional acrylate having six pentyleneoxy chains, and TPA-330, which is a trifunctional acrylate having three isobutyleneoxy chains.
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound include urethane acrylates described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, JP-B-2-16765, Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418 are also suitable. Further, addition polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are used. Thus, a colored composition having an extremely excellent photosensitive speed can be obtained.
  • urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (manufactured by Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA- 306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha) and the like.
  • the content of the curable compound is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and further preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less, and still more preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • One curable compound may be used alone, or two or more curable compounds may be used in combination. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a polyfunctional thiol compound having two or more mercapto groups in the molecule for the purpose of promoting the reaction of the polymerizable compound.
  • the polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably a secondary alkanethiol, and particularly preferably a compound having a structure represented by the following general formula (T1).
  • T1 In the formula (T1), n represents an integer of 2 to 4, and L represents a divalent to tetravalent linking group.
  • the linking group L is preferably an aliphatic group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably n is 2 and L is an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Specific examples of the polyfunctional thiol compound include compounds represented by the following structural formulas (T2) to (T4), and a compound represented by the formula (T2) is particularly preferable. These polyfunctional thiols can be used alone or in combination.
  • the content of the polyfunctional thiol is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition, and preferably 0.8 to 6 More preferably, 4% by mass.
  • Polyfunctional thiols may be added for the purpose of improving stability, odor, resolution, developability, adhesion and the like.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of a polymerizable compound, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, those having photosensitivity to visible light from the ultraviolet region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates some action with a photoexcited sensitizer and generates an active radical, or may be an initiator that initiates cationic polymerization according to the type of monomer.
  • the photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molar extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 800 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 500 nm).
  • Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, and oxime derivatives. Oxime compounds such as organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, and hydroxyacetophenones.
  • Examples of the halogenated hydrocarbon compound having a triazine skeleton include those described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc.
  • trihalomethyltriazine compounds trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, oniums
  • compounds selected from the group consisting of compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds are preferred.
  • trihalomethyltriazine compound More preferred are trihalomethyltriazine compound, ⁇ -aminoketone compound, acylphosphine compound, phosphine oxide compound, oxime compound, triallylimidazole dimer, onium compound, benzophenone compound, acetophenone compound, trihalomethyltriazine compound, ⁇ -aminoketone
  • the colored composition of the present invention when used for the production of a color filter for a solid-state imaging device, it is necessary to form a fine pattern with a sharp shape. It is important that it be developed. From such a viewpoint, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • an oxime compound as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • stepper exposure is used for curing exposure, but this exposure machine may be damaged by halogen, and the amount of photopolymerization initiator added must be kept low. Therefore, in view of these points, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as a photopolymerization initiator for forming a fine pattern such as a solid-state imaging device.
  • oxime compound can improve the color transfer.
  • paragraphs 0265 to 0268 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • hydroxyacetophenone compounds As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can also be suitably used. More specifically, for example, an aminoacetophenone initiator described in JP-A-10-291969 and an acylphosphine initiator described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can also be used.
  • hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator IRGACURE-184, DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, IRGACURE-127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • aminoacetophenone-based initiator commercially available products IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, and IRGACURE-379EG (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • aminoacetophenone-based initiator a compound described in JP-A-2009-191179 in which an absorption wavelength is matched with a long wave light source such as 365 nm or 405 nm can also be used.
  • acylphosphine initiator commercially available products such as IRGACURE-819 and DAROCUR-TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • More preferred examples of the photopolymerization initiator include oxime compounds.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound include compounds described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, and compounds described in JP-A No. 2006-342166.
  • Examples of the oxime compound that can be suitably used in the present invention include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3- (4-toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutane Examples include -2-one and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one.
  • oxime compounds other than those described above compounds described in JP-T-2009-519904 in which oxime is linked to carbazole N position, and compounds described in US Pat. No. 7,626,957 in which a hetero substituent is introduced into the benzophenone moiety
  • compounds described in JP 2010-15025 A and U.S. Patent Publication No. 2009-292039 in which a nitro group is introduced into the dye moiety ketoxime compounds described in International Publication No. 2009-131189, triazine skeleton and oxime skeleton In the same molecule, a compound described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No.
  • the oxime compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (OX-1).
  • the oxime N—O bond may be an (E) oxime compound, a (Z) oxime compound, or a mixture of (E) and (Z) isomers. .
  • R and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent
  • A represents a divalent organic group
  • Ar represents an aryl group.
  • the monovalent substituent represented by R is preferably a monovalent nonmetallic atomic group.
  • the monovalent nonmetallic atomic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, and an arylthiocarbonyl group.
  • these groups may have one or more substituents.
  • the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
  • the substituent examples include a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkyl group, and an aryl group.
  • the monovalent substituent represented by B is preferably an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an arylcarbonyl group, or a heterocyclic carbonyl group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
  • the divalent organic group represented by A is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkylene group, or an alkynylene group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
  • an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP 2010-262028 A, compounds 24 and 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and compounds described in JP-A 2013-164471 ( C-3). This content is incorporated herein.
  • a compound represented by the following general formula (1) or (2) can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or When an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms is represented and R 1 and R 2 are phenyl groups, the phenyl groups may be bonded to each other to form a fluorene group, and R 3 and R 4 are each independently Represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, wherein X is a direct bond or carbonyl Indicates a group.
  • R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 have the same meanings as R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 in Formula (1)
  • R 5 is -R 6, -OR 6 , —SR 6 , —COR 6 , —CONR 6 R 6 , —NR 6 COR 6 , —OCOR 6 , —COOR 6 , —SCOR 6 , —OCSR 6 , —COSR 6 , —CSOR 6 , —CN
  • halogen R 6 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms
  • X represents a direct bond or a carbonyl group, and a represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • R 1 and R 2 are preferably each independently a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an i-propyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a phenyl group.
  • R 3 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a tolyl group or a xylyl group.
  • R 4 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or a phenyl group.
  • R 5 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a tolyl group or a naphthyl group.
  • X is preferably a direct bond.
  • Specific examples of the compounds represented by formula (1) and formula (2) include, for example, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0076 to 0079 of JP-A No. 2014-137466. This content is incorporated herein.
  • the oxime compound preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 350 nm to 500 nm, more preferably has an absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 360 nm to 480 nm, and particularly preferably has a high absorbance at 365 nm and 405 nm.
  • the molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably from 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably from 2,000 to 300,000, more preferably from 5,000 to 200, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Is particularly preferred.
  • For the molar extinction coefficient of the compound a known method can be used.
  • an ethyl acetate solvent is used at a concentration of 0.01 g / L. It is preferable to measure. You may use the photoinitiator used for this invention in combination of 2 or more type as needed.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 30% by mass, and further preferably 1 to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition. is there. Within this range, better sensitivity and pattern formability can be obtained.
  • the colored composition of the present invention may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is a photopolymerization initiator (hereinafter also referred to as a photopolymerization initiator (a)) having an extinction coefficient of 365 nm in methanol of 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / gcm or more.
  • Photopolymerization initiator (hereinafter referred to as photopolymerization initiator) having an extinction coefficient of 365 nm in methanol of 1.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / gcm or less and an extinction coefficient of 254 nm of 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / gcm or more.
  • (B) is also preferably used in combination.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator (a) is preferably 1.5 to 10% by mass, more preferably 3 to 8% by mass, based on the total solid content of the colored composition of the present invention.
  • a sensitivity is favorable if content of a photoinitiator (a) is 10 mass% or less.
  • content of a photoinitiator (a) is 1.5 mass% or more, it will be easy to form the cured film excellent in solvent resistance.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (a) preferably has an extinction coefficient at 365 nm in methanol of 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 4 mL / gcm, and 2.0 ⁇ 10 3 to 9.0. It is more preferably ⁇ 10 3 mL / gcm, and even more preferably 6.0 ⁇ 10 3 to 8.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / gcm.
  • an oxime compound, an aminoacetophenone compound and an acylphosphine compound can be suitably used, and an oxime compound is preferable.
  • the oxime compound a compound represented by the above general formula (OX-1) is preferable.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator (a) is preferably 1.5 to 10% by mass, more preferably 3 to 8% by mass, based on the total solid content of the colored composition of the present invention. If content of a photoinitiator (a) is the said range, it will be easy to form the cured film excellent in solvent resistance.
  • a photoinitiator (a) may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (b) preferably has an extinction coefficient at 365 nm in methanol of 10 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / gcm, and 20 to 9.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / gcm. Is more preferable.
  • the difference in the extinction coefficient at a wavelength of 365 nm between the photopolymerization initiator (a) and the photopolymerization initiator (b) is preferably 9.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / gcm or more, and 9.0 ⁇ 10 2 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 5 mL / gcm is more preferable, and 9.0 ⁇ 10 2 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 4 mL / gcm is more preferable.
  • the photopolymerization initiator (b) preferably has an extinction coefficient at 254 nm in methanol of 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 6 mL / gcm, and preferably 5.0 ⁇ 10 3 to 1.0. ⁇ 10 5 mL / gcm is more preferable.
  • hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can be suitably used.
  • the hydroxyacetophenone compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (V).
  • Rv 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms), or a divalent organic compound. Represents a group.
  • Rv 1 is a divalent organic group
  • two photoactive hydroxyacetophenone structures that is, a structure in which the substituent Rv 1 is excluded from the compound represented by the general formula (V)
  • Rv 2 and Rv 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).
  • Rv 2 and Rv 3 may combine to form a ring (preferably a ring having 4 to 8 carbon atoms).
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator (b) is preferably 1.5 to 7.5% by mass and more preferably 2 to 6% by mass in the total solid content of the colored composition of the present invention. If content of a photoinitiator (b) is the said range, it will be easy to form the cured film excellent in solvent resistance.
  • a photoinitiator (b) may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
  • the colored composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin.
  • the resin is blended, for example, for the purpose of dispersing a colorant such as a pigment in the composition and the purpose of a binder.
  • a resin used mainly for dispersing a colorant such as a pigment is also referred to as a dispersant.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 5000 to 100,000.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 1000 to 20,000.
  • the resin content is preferably 5 to 90% by mass, more preferably 10 to 80% by mass, based on the total solid content of the colored composition.
  • the coloring composition of this invention contains a pigment, it is preferable to contain a dispersing agent.
  • the dispersant include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamidoamine and its salt, polycarboxylic acid and its salt, high molecular weight unsaturated acid ester, modified polyurethane, modified polyester, modified poly (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic type Copolymer, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensate], polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate ester, polyoxyethylene alkylamine, alkanolamine and the like.
  • the polymer dispersant can be further classified into a linear polymer, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer from the structure thereof.
  • Examples of the terminal-modified polymer include a polymer having a phosphate group at the terminal end described in JP-A-3-112992 and JP-T-2003-533455, and JP-A-2002-273191.
  • Examples thereof include a polymer having a sulfonic acid group at the terminal and a polymer having a partial skeleton of organic dye or a heterocyclic ring described in JP-A-9-77994.
  • polymers having two or more pigment surface anchor sites (acid groups, basic groups, organic dye partial skeletons, heterocycles, etc.) introduced at the polymer ends described in JP-A-2007-277514 are also available. It is preferable because of excellent dispersion stability.
  • Examples of the graft polymer include a polyester-based dispersant. Specifically, reaction products of poly (lower alkyleneimine) and polyester described in JP-A-54-37082, JP-A-8-507960, JP-A-2009-258668, etc.
  • Copolymers of the described macromonomer and acid group-containing monomer, basic group and acid described in JP-A-2009-203462 Such amphoteric dispersion resin having the like.
  • Macromonomer AA-6 manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd. Acid-6
  • AS-6 polystyrene whose terminal group is a methacryloyl group
  • AN-6S a copolymer of styrene and acrylonitrile whose terminal group is a methacryloyl group
  • AB-6 polyyester whose terminal group is a methacryloyl group
  • Placel FM5 manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.
  • block polymers As the block polymer, block polymers described in JP-A Nos. 2003-49110 and 2009-52010 are preferable.
  • the pigment dispersant is also available as a commercial product, and as such a specific example, “DA-7301” manufactured by Enomoto Kasei Co., Ltd., “Disperbyk-101 (polyamide amine phosphate), 107 (carboxylic acid ester), BY (Chemical acid ester)” manufactured by BYK Chemie, 130 (polyamide), 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 170 (polymer copolymer) ”,“ BYK-P104, P105 (high molecular weight unsaturated polycarboxylic acid) ”,“ EFKA 4047, 4050-4010-4165 (polyurethane type) manufactured by EFKA Corporation ), EFKA 4330-4340 (block copolymer), 4400-4402 (modified polyacrylate), 5010 (polyester amide), 5765 (high molecular weight polycarboxylate), 6220 (fatty acid polyester), 6745 (phthalocyanine derivative), 6750 (Azo pigment
  • the content of the dispersant is preferably 1 to 80 parts by mass, more preferably 5 to 70 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. More preferably, it is part by mass.
  • the coloring composition of this invention can contain alkali-soluble resin as resin. By containing an alkali-soluble resin, developability and pattern formability are improved.
  • the alkali-soluble resin can also be used as a dispersant or a binder.
  • the molecular weight of the alkali-soluble resin is not particularly defined, but the weight average molecular weight (Mw) is preferably 5000 to 100,000.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 1000 to 20,000.
  • the alkali-soluble resin may be a linear organic polymer, and has at least one alkali-soluble polymer in a molecule (preferably a molecule having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain). It can be suitably selected from alkali-soluble resins having groups to promote.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is preferably a polyhydroxystyrene resin, a polysiloxane resin, an acrylic resin, an acrylamide resin, or an acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resin from the viewpoint of heat resistance.
  • Acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferred.
  • Examples of the group that promotes alkali solubility include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. What can be developed is preferable, and (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • a known radical polymerization method can be applied.
  • Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, type of solvent, etc. when producing an alkali-soluble resin by radical polymerization can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and the conditions are determined experimentally. It can also be done.
  • the alkali-soluble resin a polymer having a carboxylic acid in the side chain is preferable, and a methacrylic acid copolymer, an acrylic acid copolymer, an itaconic acid copolymer, a crotonic acid copolymer, a maleic acid copolymer, and a partial esterification are used.
  • a methacrylic acid copolymer, an acrylic acid copolymer, an itaconic acid copolymer, a crotonic acid copolymer, a maleic acid copolymer, and a partial esterification are used.
  • examples thereof include maleic acid copolymers, alkali-soluble phenol resins such as novolak resins, acidic cellulose derivatives having a carboxyl group in the side chain, and polymers having a hydroxyl group added with an acid anhydride.
  • a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid and another monomer copolymerizable therewith is suitable as the alkali-soluble resin.
  • examples of other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid include alkyl (meth) acrylates, aryl (meth) acrylates, and vinyl compounds.
  • alkyl (meth) acrylate and aryl (meth) acrylate methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate, Hexyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, tolyl (meth) acrylate, naphthyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl methacrylate, etc.
  • Examples of the vinyl compound include styrene, ⁇ -methyl styrene, vinyl toluene, acrylonitrile, vinyl acetate, N-vinyl pyrrolidone, polystyrene macromonomer, polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer and the like.
  • Examples of other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid include N-substituted maleimide monomers described in JP-A-10-300922, such as N-phenylmaleimide and N-cyclohexylmaleimide. Can do. In addition, only 1 type may be sufficient as the other monomer copolymerizable with these (meth) acrylic acids, and 2 or more types may be sufficient as it.
  • an alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group may be used.
  • the polymerizable group include a (meth) allyl group and a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • the alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group an alkali-soluble resin containing a polymerizable group in a side chain is useful.
  • the alkali-soluble resin containing a polymerizable group include: Dial NR series (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Photomer 6173 (manufactured by COOH containing polyurethane acrylic oligomer. Diamond Shamrock Co.
  • Alkali-soluble resins include benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid copolymer, benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate copolymer, benzyl (meth) acrylate / Multi-component copolymers composed of (meth) acrylic acid / other monomers can be preferably used.
  • Acrybase FF-426 manufactured by Fujikura Kasei Co., Ltd.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is a monomer containing a compound represented by the following general formula (ED1) and / or a compound represented by the following general formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as “ether dimers”). It is also preferable to include a polymer (a) obtained by polymerizing the components.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the description in JP 2010-168539 A can be referred to.
  • the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent represented by R 1 and R 2 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include methyl, ethyl, n Linear or branched alkyl groups such as -propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, tert-amyl, stearyl, lauryl, 2-ethylhexyl; aryl groups such as phenyl; cyclohexyl, tert-butylcyclohexyl Alicyclic groups such as dicyclopentadienyl, tricyclodecanyl, isobornyl, adamantyl and 2-methyl-2-adamantyl; alkyl groups substituted with alkoxy such as 1-methoxyethyl and 1-ethoxyethyl; benzyl An alkyl group substituted with an aryl group such as;
  • ether dimer for example, paragraph 0317 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. Only one type of ether dimer may be used, or two or more types may be used.
  • the structure derived from the compound represented by the general formula (ED) may be copolymerized with other monomers.
  • the alkali-soluble resin may contain a structural unit derived from a compound represented by the following formula (X).
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms
  • R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or a benzene ring that may contain a benzene ring.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 15.
  • the alkylene group of R 2 preferably has 2 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group of R 3 has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, and the alkyl group of R 3 may contain a benzene ring.
  • Examples of the alkyl group containing a benzene ring represented by R 3 include a benzyl group and a 2-phenyl (iso) propyl group.
  • the acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH / g.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, and still more preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 400 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, particularly preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, and even more preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the content of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 1 to 15% by mass, more preferably 2 to 12% by mass, with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition. 10 mass% is still more preferable.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of alkali-soluble resin, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention preferably contains a pigment derivative.
  • the pigment derivative is preferably a compound having a structure in which a part of an organic pigment is substituted with an acidic group, a basic group or a phthalimidomethyl group.
  • a pigment derivative having an acidic group or a basic group is preferable.
  • Particularly preferred are pigment derivatives having a basic group.
  • the combination of the resin (dispersant) and the pigment derivative described above is preferably a combination in which the dispersant is an acidic dispersant and the pigment derivative has a basic group.
  • organic pigment for constituting the pigment derivative examples include diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments, azo pigments, phthalocyanine pigments, anthraquinone pigments, quinacridone pigments, dioxazine pigments, perinone pigments, perylene pigments, thioindigo pigments , Isoindoline pigments, isoindolinone pigments, quinophthalone pigments, selenium pigments, metal complex pigments, and the like.
  • a sulfonic acid group a carboxylic acid group, and its salt
  • a carboxylic acid group and a sulfonic acid group are more preferable
  • a sulfonic acid group is especially preferable.
  • the basic group possessed by the pigment derivative is preferably an amino group, particularly preferably a tertiary amino group.
  • the content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 30% by mass, and more preferably 3 to 20% by mass with respect to the mass of the pigment. Only one pigment derivative may be used, or two or more pigment derivatives may be used in combination.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain an organic solvent.
  • the organic solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as the solubility of each component and the coating property of the coloring composition are satisfied, but in consideration of the solubility, coating property, and safety of the colorant and the curable compound. It is preferable to be selected.
  • organic solvents examples include esters such as ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, cyclohexyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, and ethyl lactate.
  • Alkyl oxyacetates eg, methyl oxyacetate, ethyl oxyacetate, butyl oxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate)
  • alkyl 3-oxypropionate Esters eg, methyl 3-oxypropionate, ethyl 3-oxypropionate, etc.
  • 2-oxypropionic acid alkyl esters eg, methyl 2-oxypropionate, ethyl 2-oxypropionate, propyl 2-oxypropionate, etc.
  • the organic solvent preferably has a peroxide content of 0.8 mmol / L or less, and more preferably contains substantially no peroxide.
  • the content of the organic solvent in the colored composition is preferably such that the total solid concentration of the colored composition is 5% to 80% by mass, and more preferably 5 to 60% by mass, from the viewpoint of applicability. 10 to 50% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of organic solvent or two or more types of organic solvents. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • Polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine primary cerium salt and the like.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass with respect to the mass of the coloring composition.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • surfactant Various surfactants may be added to the colored composition of the present invention from the viewpoint of further improving coatability.
  • various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
  • the liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid are further improved. That is, in the case of forming a film using a coloring composition containing a fluorosurfactant, the wettability to the coated surface is improved by reducing the interfacial tension between the coated surface and the coating liquid, The coating property to the coated surface is improved. For this reason, even when a thin film of about several ⁇ m is formed with a small amount of liquid, it is effective in that it is possible to more suitably form a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness.
  • the fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in a colored composition.
  • fluorosurfactant examples include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, F780, F781 (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, Same SC-103, Same SC-104, Same SC-105, Same SC1068, Same SC-381, Same SC-383, Same S393, Same KH-40 (above, manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PolyFox (registered trademark) PF-636, PF-656, PF-6320, PF-6520, PF-7002 (manufactured by OMNOVA), etc.
  • fluorosurfactant a fluorosurfactant described in JP 2010-32698 A can also be used.
  • fluorosurfactant a block polymer can be used. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-89090.
  • the fluorosurfactant has 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) repeating units derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and an alkyleneoxy group (preferably an ethyleneoxy group and / or a propyleneoxy group) (A fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound can also be preferably used.
  • the fluoropolymer which has an ethylenically unsaturated group in a side chain can also be used as a fluorine-type surfactant.
  • Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A 2010-164965, paragraphs 0050 to 0090 and paragraphs 0289 to 0295, such as MegaFac RS-101, RS-102, and RS-718K manufactured by DIC.
  • nonionic surfactant examples include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, and ethoxylates and propoxylates thereof (for example, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene Stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester (Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62 manufactured by BASF, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2, Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1) Solsperse 20000 (Lubrizol Japan Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • cationic surfactant examples include phthalocyanine derivatives (trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • phthalocyanine derivatives trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.
  • organosiloxane polymer KP341 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • W001 manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.
  • anionic surfactants include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • silicone surfactant examples include “Toray Silicone DC3PA”, “Toray Silicone SH7PA”, “Toray Silicone DC11PA”, “Tore Silicone SH21PA”, “Tore Silicone SH28PA”, “Toray Silicone” manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.001%, based on the total mass of the coloring composition. 005 to 1.0% by mass.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of surfactant or two or more types of surfactant. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • additives for example, fillers, adhesion promoters, antioxidants, ultraviolet absorbers, anti-aggregation agents, and the like can be blended with the colored composition of the present invention as necessary.
  • these additives include those described in JP-A No. 2004-295116, paragraphs 0155 to 0156, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a sensitizer and a light stabilizer described in paragraph 0078 of JP-A No. 2004-295116 and a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0081 of the same publication.
  • the colored composition may contain a metal element, but from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of defects, the content of Group 2 elements (calcium, magnesium, etc.) in the colored composition is 50 ppm or less. It is preferable to control to 0.01 to 10 ppm.
  • the total amount of the inorganic metal salt in the coloring composition is preferably 100 ppm or less, and more preferably controlled to 0.5 to 50 ppm.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is prepared by mixing the aforementioned components.
  • the components constituting the colored composition may be blended together, or may be blended sequentially after each component is dissolved and dispersed in a solvent.
  • the composition may be prepared by dissolving and dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time. If necessary, each component may be suitably used as two or more solutions / dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be mixed to prepare a composition.
  • the colored composition of the present invention is preferably filtered with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances or reducing defects.
  • any filter can be used without particular limitation as long as it has been conventionally used for filtration.
  • fluororesin such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyamide resin such as nylon (eg nylon-6, nylon-6,6), polyolefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (high density, ultra high molecular weight)
  • PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
  • nylon eg nylon-6, nylon-6,6)
  • polyolefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (high density, ultra high molecular weight)
  • polypropylene including high density polypropylene
  • nylon polypropylene
  • the pore size of the filter is suitably about 0.01 to 7.0 ⁇ m, preferably about 0.01 to 3.0 ⁇ m, more preferably about 0.05 to 0.5 ⁇ m.
  • a fiber-shaped filter medium examples include polypropylene fiber, nylon fiber, glass fiber, and the like. , TPR005, etc.) and SHPX type series (SHPX003 etc.) filter cartridges can be used.
  • the filtering by the first filter may be performed only once or may be performed twice or more.
  • the pore diameter here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer.
  • a commercially available filter for example, it can be selected from various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd., Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.) or KITZ Micro Filter Co., Ltd. .
  • the second filter a filter formed of the same material as the first filter described above can be used.
  • the filtering by the first filter may be performed only with the dispersion, and the second filtering may be performed after mixing other components.
  • the color filter of the present invention is obtained by using the colored composition of the present invention.
  • the pattern forming method of the present invention includes a step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, a step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern, and developing and removing unexposed portions. And a process of forming a colored pattern. Furthermore, you may provide the process (prebaking process) of baking a colored composition layer, and the process (post-baking process) of baking the developed coloring pattern as needed. Details of each step will be described below.
  • Step of Forming Colored Composition Layer In the step of forming the colored composition layer, the colored composition layer is formed on the support using the colored composition of the present invention.
  • the support examples include transparent substrates such as glass, silicon, polycarbonate, polyester, aromatic polyamide, polyamideimide, and polyimide.
  • a thin film transistor for driving the organic EL element may be formed on these transparent substrates.
  • a solid-state imaging device substrate in which a solid-state imaging device (light receiving element) such as a CCD or CMOS is provided on the substrate can be used.
  • various methods such as slit coating, ink jet method, spin coating, cast coating, roll coating, screen printing method and the like can be used.
  • the colored composition layer formed on the support is preferably heated (pre-baked).
  • the heating is preferably performed at 120 ° C. or less, more preferably 50 to 120 ° C., further preferably 80 to 110 ° C., and particularly preferably 90 to 105 ° C.
  • the heating time is preferably 10 seconds to 300 seconds, more preferably 40 to 250 seconds, and further preferably 80 to 220 seconds. Heating can be performed with a hot plate, oven, or the like.
  • Exposure process the colored composition layer formed on the support is exposed in a pattern (exposure process).
  • pattern exposure can be performed by exposing the colored composition layer formed on the support using a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using an exposure apparatus such as a stepper. Thereby, an exposed part can be hardened.
  • radiation (light) that can be used for exposure ultraviolet rays such as g-line and i-line are preferable (particularly preferably i-line).
  • Irradiation dose (exposure dose) for example, preferably 0.03 ⁇ 2.5J / cm 2, more preferably 0.05 ⁇ 1.0J / cm 2, most preferably 0.08 ⁇ 0.5J / cm 2 .
  • the oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be appropriately selected.
  • the exposure illuminance can be set as appropriate, and can usually be selected from the range of 1000 W / m 2 to 100,000 W / m 2 (eg, 5000 W / m 2 , 15000 W / m 2 , 35000 W / m 2 ). .
  • Oxygen concentration and exposure illuminance may appropriately combined conditions, for example, illuminance 10000 W / m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 10 vol%, oxygen concentration of 35 vol% can be such illuminance 20000W / m 2.
  • the thickness of the cured film is preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 0.1 to 0.9 ⁇ m, and further preferably 0.2 to 0.8 ⁇ m. By setting the film thickness to 1.0 ⁇ m or less, high resolution and high adhesion can be easily obtained.
  • the unexposed portion is developed and removed to form a colored pattern.
  • the development removal of the unexposed portion can be performed using a developer.
  • the coloring composition layer of the unexposed part in an exposure process elutes in a developing solution, and only the photocured part remains.
  • the developer an organic alkali developer that does not damage the underlying solid-state imaging device or circuit is desirable.
  • the temperature of the developer is preferably 20 to 30 ° C., for example.
  • the development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds.
  • alkaline agent used in the developer examples include ammonia water, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide.
  • organic alkaline compounds such as choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5,4,0] -7-undecene.
  • the inorganic alkali for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium oxalate, sodium metasuccinate and the like are preferable.
  • a surfactant may be used for the developer. Examples of the surfactant include the above-described surfactants, and nonionic surfactants are preferable.
  • the amount is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by weight, more preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by weight, based on the total weight of the developer.
  • the developing solution which consists of such alkaline aqueous solution, generally it is preferable to wash
  • Post-baking is a heat treatment after development for accelerating curing, and the heating temperature is preferably 100 to 240 ° C., for example.
  • an organic EL element is used as the light source of the image display device, or when the photoelectric conversion film of the image sensor is made of an organic material, it is 50 to 120 ° C. (more preferably 80 to 100 ° C., more preferably 80 ° C.
  • heat treatment post-bake
  • the post-baking treatment can be carried out continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer) or a high-frequency heater so that the film after development is in the above condition. it can.
  • the exposure step exposure is performed with light having a wavelength of more than 350 nm and not more than 380 nm (preferably, light having a wavelength of 355 to 370 nm, particularly preferably i-line), and further to the colored composition layer after the development step, the wavelength 254 It is also preferable to perform exposure with light having a wavelength of ⁇ 350 nm (preferably light having a wavelength of 254 nm).
  • the difference between the wavelength of light used in the exposure before the development step and the wavelength of light used in the exposure after the development step is preferably 200 nm or less, and more preferably 100 to 150 nm or less. .
  • the irradiation amount of 380nm or less light than the wavelength 350 nm is preferably 30mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 1500mJ / cm 2, 50mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 100 0 mJ / cm 2 is more preferable.
  • the reaction rate of the polymerizable compound in the exposure before the development step is preferably 30 to 60%. By setting such a reaction rate, the polymerizable compound can be appropriately cured.
  • the reaction rate of the compound having a polymerizable compound refers to the ratio of the reacted unsaturated double bond in all the unsaturated double bonds of the polymerizable compound.
  • the irradiation amount of light of wavelength 254 ⁇ 300 nm is preferably 30mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 4000mJ / cm 2, 50mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 3500mJ / cm 2 is more preferable.
  • the reaction rate of the polymerizable compound in the exposure after the development step is preferably 60 to 90%. By setting it as such a reaction rate, the hardening state of the coloring composition layer after exposure can be made more favorable.
  • post-baking may be performed after exposure after the development step.
  • an organic EL element is used as a light source of an image display device, or a photoelectric conversion film of an image sensor is organic.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be suitably used for a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD or CMOS, and is particularly suitable for a CCD or CMOS having a high resolution exceeding 1 million pixels.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be used as, for example, a color filter disposed between a light receiving portion of each pixel constituting a CCD or CMOS and a microlens for condensing light.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be preferably used for an organic EL device.
  • the organic EL element a white organic EL element is preferable.
  • the organic EL element preferably has a tandem structure.
  • JP 2003-45676 A supervised by Akiyoshi Mikami, “Frontier of Organic EL Technology Development-High Brightness, High Precision, Long Life, Know-how Collection”, Technical Information Association, 326-328 pages, 2008, etc.
  • Examples of the tandem structure of the organic EL element include a structure in which an organic EL layer is provided between a lower electrode having light reflectivity and an upper electrode having light transmittance on one surface of a substrate.
  • the lower electrode is preferably made of a material having a sufficient reflectance in the visible light wavelength region.
  • the organic EL layer preferably includes a plurality of light emitting layers and has a stacked structure (tandem structure) in which the plurality of light emitting layers are stacked.
  • the organic EL layer may include a red light emitting layer, a green light emitting layer, and a blue light emitting layer in the plurality of light emitting layers. And it is preferable that they have a some light emission auxiliary layer for light-emitting a light emitting layer together with a some light emitting layer.
  • the organic EL layer can have, for example, a stacked structure in which light emitting layers and light emitting auxiliary layers are alternately stacked.
  • An organic EL element having an organic EL layer having such a structure can emit white light.
  • the spectrum of white light emitted from the organic EL element preferably has a strong maximum emission peak in the blue region (430 nm to 485 nm), the green region (530 nm to 580 nm), and the yellow region (580 nm to 620 nm).
  • those having a maximum emission peak in the red region (650 nm to 700 nm) are more preferable.
  • the film thickness of the colored pattern (colored pixel) in the color filter of the present invention is preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 0.7 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit can be, for example, 0.1 ⁇ m or more, and can also be 0.2 ⁇ m or more.
  • the size (pattern width) of the colored pattern (colored pixel) is preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 1.7 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit can be, for example, 0.1 ⁇ m or more, and can also be 0.2 ⁇ m or more.
  • the solid-state imaging device of the present invention includes the above-described color filter of the present invention.
  • the configuration of the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration that includes the color filter of the present invention and functions as a solid-state imaging device.
  • the support has a transfer electrode made of a plurality of photodiodes and polysilicon constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.). It has a light-shielding film made of tungsten or the like that is open only in the light-receiving part, and has a device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light-shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light-shielding film and the photodiode light-receiving part.
  • the solid-state image sensor color filter of the present invention is included.
  • a configuration having a light condensing means for example, a microlens, etc., the same applies hereinafter
  • a structure having the light condensing means on the color filter It may be.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be used in an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic electroluminescence display device.
  • display devices For the definition of display devices and details of each display device, refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Kenkyukai, 1990)”, “Display Device (Junsho Ibuki, Industrial Books Co., Ltd.) Issued in the first year).
  • the liquid crystal display device is described, for example, in “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”.
  • the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
  • the color filter of the present invention may be used in a color TFT (Thin Film Transistor) type liquid crystal display device.
  • the color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”.
  • the present invention relates to a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a horizontal electric field driving method such as IPS (In Plane Switching), a pixel division method such as MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignment), a STN (Super-Twist Nematic).
  • IPS In Plane Switching
  • MVA Multi-domain Vertical Alignment
  • STN Super-Twist Nematic
  • the color filter in the present invention can be used for a bright and high-definition COA (Color-filter On Array) system.
  • COA Color-filter On Array
  • the required characteristics for the color filter layer require the required characteristics for the interlayer insulating film, that is, the low dielectric constant and the resistance to the stripping solution, in addition to the normal required characteristics as described above.
  • the color filter of the present invention is excellent in light resistance and the like, a COA type liquid crystal display device having high resolution and excellent long-term durability can be provided.
  • a resin film may be provided on the color filter layer.
  • the liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter of the present invention includes various members such as an electrode substrate, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a backlight, a spacer, and a viewing angle guarantee film.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be applied to a liquid crystal display device composed of these known members.
  • these components for example, “'94 Liquid Crystal Display Peripheral Materials / Chemicals Market (Kentaro Shima CMC 1994)”, “2003 Liquid Crystal Related Markets Current Status and Future Prospects (Volume 2)” Fuji Chimera Research Institute, Ltd., published in 2003) ”.
  • backlighting SID meeting Digest 1380 (2005) (A. Konno et.al), Monthly Display December 2005, pages 18-24 (Yasuhiro Shima), pages 25-30 (Takaaki Yagi), etc. Are listed.
  • the color filter according to the present invention When the color filter according to the present invention is used in a liquid crystal display device, a high contrast can be realized when combined with a conventionally known three-wavelength tube of a cold cathode tube, and further, red, green and blue diode light sources (RGB-LED).
  • RGB-LED red, green and blue diode light sources
  • Pigment Blue 15: 6 15 parts as a pigment
  • Disperbyk-161 manufactured by BYK Chemie
  • PGMEA propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • PV23 CI Pigment Violet 23
  • PVP23 Pigment Dispersion
  • a mixture of 15 parts of Pigment Violet 23, 50 parts of Disperbyk-161 (manufactured by BYK Chemie) as a resin (dispersant), and 35 parts of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) as a solvent was mixed for 15 hours by a bead mill. Dispersed to prepare a PV23 pigment dispersion.
  • A-4 The following structure (pigment monomer)
  • A-7 The following structure (pigment multimer (mass ratio of units having tri
  • B-5 The following structure (pigment monomer
  • Each colored composition was spin-coated on a glass substrate so that the dry film thickness was 2 ⁇ m. Then, this coating film was subjected to heat treatment (pre-baking) at 90 ° C. for 120 seconds. Next, using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.), exposure was performed at an exposure amount of 200 mJ / cm 2 through an Island pattern mask having a pattern of 1.0 ⁇ m square at a wavelength of 365 nm. Next, the exposed coating film was subjected to heat treatment (post-baking) at 100 ° C. for 300 seconds. The color filter was manufactured by the above.
  • the transmission spectral characteristics of the obtained color filter were measured with a spectrophotometer MCPD-3000 (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.).
  • ⁇ Evaluation criteria> 5 The transmittance at a wavelength of 500 nm is less than 40%, the average transmittance at a wavelength of 550 to 650 nm is less than 3%, and the maximum transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 460 nm is 85% or more.
  • the transmittance at a wavelength of 500 nm is less than 40%, the average transmittance at a wavelength of 550 to 650 nm is less than 3%, and the maximum transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 460 nm is 80% or more and less than 85%.
  • the transmittance at a wavelength of 500 nm is less than 40%, the average transmittance at a wavelength of 550 to 650 nm is less than 3%, and the maximum transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 460 nm is 75% or more and less than 80%.
  • the transmittance at a wavelength of 500 nm is less than 40%, the average transmittance at a wavelength of 550 to 650 nm is less than 3%, and the maximum transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 460 nm is 70% or more and less than 75%.
  • the transmittance at a wavelength of 500 nm is less than 40%, the average transmittance at a wavelength of 550 to 650 nm is less than 3%, and the maximum transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 460 nm is less than 70%.
  • the transmittance at a wavelength of 500 nm is 40% or more, or the average transmittance at a wavelength of 550 to 650 nm is 3% or more.
  • Residual film ratio (film thickness of color filter after being immersed in PGMEA for 10 minutes / film thickness of color filter before being immersed in PGMEA) ⁇ 100 ⁇ Evaluation criteria> 5: The remaining film rate is 100%. 4: The remaining film ratio is 98% or more. 3: The remaining film ratio is 95% or more and less than 98%. 2: The remaining film ratio is 90% or more and less than 95%. 1: The remaining film rate is 80% or more and less than 90%. 0: Remaining film ratio is less than 80%.
  • a color filter was produced by the same method as the spectral characteristic evaluation.
  • the maximum transmittance T0 in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm of the obtained color filter was measured using MCPD-3000 (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.).
  • the following red coloring composition for color mixture evaluation is spin-coated on the obtained color filter so that the film thickness after drying becomes 2 ⁇ m, and heat treatment (prebaking) is performed at 100 ° C. for 120 seconds. It was.
  • shower development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) without performing exposure with an i-line stepper exposure apparatus.
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • the maximum transmittance T1 in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm of the color filter after the development and removal of the red coloring composition for color mixture evaluation was measured using MCPD-3000 (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.).
  • the maximum transmittance change is 1% or more and less than 3%.
  • 2 The maximum transmittance change is 3% or more and less than 5%.
  • 1 The maximum transmittance change is 5% or more and less than 10%.
  • 0 Maximum transmittance change is 10% or more.
  • FIG. 1 (c) As shown, the separation component appears granular on the membrane surface 1: As shown in FIG. 1 (d), the separation component appears as spots on the membrane surface 0: Phase separation occurred and the membrane separated into two layers.
  • 1 (a) shows the upper left frame of FIG. 1
  • FIG. 1 (b) shows the upper right frame of FIG. 1
  • FIG. 1 (c) shows the lower left frame of FIG. (D) shows the lower right frame of FIG.
  • the colored composition of the example was able to produce a color filter having good spectral characteristics and excellent solvent resistance. Further, the color filter of the example had a small color mixture with other colors. Furthermore, in the high-temperature and high-humidity test, separation of membrane components was small, and the reliability of the membrane was excellent. On the other hand, the comparative example was unable to achieve both spectroscopic and solvent resistance.

Abstract

A coloring composition which contains a dye A having a triarylmethane skeleton, a dye B having a xanthene skeleton and a curable compound, and wherein at least one of the dye A and the dye B is a dye multimer; a color filter which uses this coloring composition; a pattern forming method; a method for producing a color filter; a solid-state imaging element; and an image display device.

Description

着色組成物、カラーフィルタ、パターン形成方法、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子、および、画像表示装置Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
 本発明は、着色組成物に関する。また、カラーフィルタ、パターン形成方法、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子、および、画像表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a coloring composition. The present invention also relates to a color filter, a pattern forming method, a color filter manufacturing method, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device.
 CCDやCMOSなどのイメージセンサを備えた固体撮像素子、液晶表示装置、その他の光学素子のキーデバイスとして、カラーフィルタが使用されている。カラーフィルタは、通常、赤(R)、緑(G)、及び青(B)の3原色の着色パターンを備えており、透過光を3原色へ分解する役割を果たしている。 Color filters are used as key devices for solid-state image sensors, liquid crystal display devices, and other optical elements equipped with image sensors such as CCD and CMOS. The color filter normally includes a coloring pattern of three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B), and plays a role of separating transmitted light into the three primary colors.
 カラーフィルタは、着色組成物をガラス基板などの基材上に適用し、100℃程度のプリベークを行い、次いで露光および現像を行ったパターンを形成し、210℃程度のポストベークを行って製造される。 The color filter is manufactured by applying a colored composition onto a base material such as a glass substrate, prebaking at about 100 ° C., forming a pattern after exposure and development, and performing post baking at about 210 ° C. The
 青色の着色パターン(青色のカラーフィルタ)は、従来より、カラーインデックス(C.I.)ピグメントブルー15:6と、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット23とを含む着色組成物を用いて製造されている。
 特許文献1には、キサンテン骨格を有する色素多量体と、C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6とを含む着色組成物を用いてカラーフィルタを製造することが開示されている。
 また、特許文献2には、トリアリールメタン骨格を有する色素多量体を含む着色組成物を用いてカラーフィルタを製造することが開示されている。
Conventionally, a blue coloring pattern (blue color filter) has a color index (CI) pigment blue 15: 6 and C.I. I. It is manufactured using a coloring composition containing CI Pigment Violet 23.
Patent Document 1 discloses a dye multimer having a xanthene skeleton, C.I. I. It is disclosed that a color filter is produced using a coloring composition containing CI Pigment Blue 15: 6.
Patent Document 2 discloses that a color filter is produced using a coloring composition containing a dye multimer having a triarylmethane skeleton.
特開2012-32754号公報JP 2012-32754 A 米国特許出願公開第2013/0141810号明細書US Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0141810
 特許文献1に開示されたカラーフィルタは、従来の青色カラーフィルタである、C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6と、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット23との組み合わせからなる着色剤を含む着色組成物を用いて形成したカラーフィルタよりも分光特性に優れているが、近年においては、カラーフィルタの分光特性のさらなる向上が求められている。
 一方、トリアリールメタン単独では、分光特性が劣る傾向にあり、特許文献2に開示されたカラーフィルタは、分光特性が劣ることが分かった。
The color filter disclosed in Patent Document 1 is a conventional blue color filter, C.I. I. Pigment blue 15: 6 and C.I. I. Although it is superior in spectral characteristics to a color filter formed using a coloring composition containing a colorant composed of a combination with Pigment Violet 23, in recent years, further improvement in the spectral characteristics of the color filter has been demanded.
On the other hand, triarylmethane alone tends to have poor spectral characteristics, and the color filter disclosed in Patent Document 2 has been found to have poor spectral characteristics.
 近年においては、液晶表示装置の発光光源の有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(有機EL)化や、イメージセンサーの光電変換膜の有機素材化が行われている。その特性上、カラーフィルタは、100℃程度の低温で製造することが要求されている。
 しかしながら、低温で硬化して製造したカラーフィルタは、耐溶剤性が低下する傾向にあることが分かった。
In recent years, organic electroluminescence (organic EL) of a light emission source of a liquid crystal display device and organic material of a photoelectric conversion film of an image sensor have been performed. Due to its characteristics, the color filter is required to be manufactured at a low temperature of about 100 ° C.
However, it was found that the color filter produced by curing at a low temperature tends to decrease the solvent resistance.
 よって、本発明の目的は、分光特性および耐溶剤性が良好なカラーフィルタなどの硬化膜を形成可能な着色組成物、カラーフィルタ、パターン形成方法、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子、および、画像表示装置を提供することを目的とする。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a colored composition capable of forming a cured film such as a color filter having good spectral characteristics and solvent resistance, a color filter, a pattern forming method, a color filter manufacturing method, a solid-state imaging device, and An object is to provide an image display device.
 本発明者らは詳細に検討した結果、キサンテン骨格を有する色素と、トリアリールメタン骨格を有する色素とを併用することで、分光特性の良い硬化膜を形成できることを見出した。そして、キサンテン骨格を有する色素、および、トリアリールメタン骨格を有する色素から選ばれる少なくとも一つを、色素多量体とすることで、着色組成物を低温で硬化して硬化膜を形成した場合であっても、耐溶剤性に優れた硬化膜が得られることを見出し、本発明を完成するに至った。本発明は以下を提供する。
<1> トリアリールメタン骨格を有する色素Aと、キサンテン骨格を有する色素Bと、硬化性化合物と、を含み、色素Aおよび色素Bから選ばれる少なくとも一種が、色素多量体である、着色組成物。
<2> 色素Aおよび色素Bが色素多量体である、<1>に記載の着色組成物。
<3> 色素Aのトリアリールメタン骨格のモル数と、色素Bのキサンテン骨格のモル数との比が、40:60~75:25である、<1>に記載の着色組成物。
<4> 色素Aおよび色素Bから選ばれる少なくとも一種が、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン、トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンおよびテトラアリールボレートアニオンから選択される少なくとも一種のアニオンを有する、<1>~<3>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<5> 色素Aは、トリアリールメタン骨格を有するカチオン部と、カチオン部と共有結合を介して結合したアニオンとを有する、<1>~<4>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<6> 色素Bは、キサンテン骨格を有するカチオン部と、カチオン部と共有結合を介して結合したアニオンとを有する、<1>~<4>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<7> 色素Aおよび色素Bから選ばれる少なくとも一種が、重合性不飽和二重結合を含む基を有する、<1>~<6>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<8> <1>~<7>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物を用いたカラーフィルタ。
    ・ 有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子用である、<8>に記載のカラーフィルタ。
<10> <1>~<7>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する工程と、着色成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成する工程と、着色パターンを50~120℃で加熱する工程と、を含むパターン形成方法。
<11> <10>に記載のパターン形成方法を含む、カラーフィルタの製造方法。
<12> <8>に記載のカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子。
<13> <8>に記載のカラーフィルタを有する画像表示装置。
As a result of detailed studies, the present inventors have found that a cured film having good spectral characteristics can be formed by using a dye having a xanthene skeleton in combination with a dye having a triarylmethane skeleton. Then, at least one selected from a dye having a xanthene skeleton and a dye having a triarylmethane skeleton is a dye multimer, whereby the colored composition is cured at a low temperature to form a cured film. However, the present inventors have found that a cured film excellent in solvent resistance can be obtained, and have completed the present invention. The present invention provides the following.
<1> A coloring composition comprising a dye A having a triarylmethane skeleton, a dye B having a xanthene skeleton, and a curable compound, wherein at least one selected from the dye A and the dye B is a dye multimer. .
<2> The colored composition according to <1>, wherein the dye A and the dye B are dye multimers.
<3> The colored composition according to <1>, wherein the ratio of the number of moles of the triarylmethane skeleton of the dye A to the number of moles of the xanthene skeleton of the dye B is 40:60 to 75:25.
<4> At least one selected from Dye A and Dye B has at least one anion selected from a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, and a tetraarylborate anion <1> to <3> The coloring composition in any one of.
<5> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the dye A has a cation moiety having a triarylmethane skeleton and an anion bonded to the cation moiety via a covalent bond.
<6> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the dye B has a cation moiety having a xanthene skeleton and an anion bonded to the cation moiety via a covalent bond.
<7> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, wherein at least one selected from Dye A and Dye B has a group containing a polymerizable unsaturated double bond.
<8> A color filter using the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <7>.
-The color filter as described in <8> for organic electroluminescent elements.
<10> A step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <7>, a step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern, A pattern forming method comprising: a step of developing and removing an exposed portion to form a colored pattern; and a step of heating the colored pattern at 50 to 120 ° C.
<11> A method for producing a color filter, comprising the pattern forming method according to <10>.
<12> A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to <8>.
<13> An image display device having the color filter according to <8>.
 本発明によれば、分光特性および耐溶剤性が良好なカラーフィルタなどの硬化膜を形成可能な着色組成物、カラーフィルタ、パターン形成方法、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子、および、画像表示装置を提供することが可能となった。 According to the present invention, a colored composition capable of forming a cured film such as a color filter having good spectral characteristics and solvent resistance, a color filter, a pattern forming method, a color filter manufacturing method, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display It became possible to provide a device.
信頼性評価の評価基準を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the evaluation criteria of reliability evaluation.
 以下において、本発明の内容について詳細に説明する。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
 本明細書において光とは、活性光線または放射線を意味する。また、「活性光線」または「放射線」とは、例えば、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等を意味する。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、水銀灯、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、X線、EUV光などによる露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線による描画も露光に含める。
 本明細書において「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 本明細書において、全固形分とは、着色組成物の全組成から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレートおよびメタクリレートの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリルおよびメタクリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アリル」は、アリルおよびメタリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルの双方、または、いずれかを表す。
 本明細書において、重合性化合物とは、重合性官能基を有する化合物のことをいい、モノマーであっても、ポリマーであってもよい。重合性官能基とは、重合反応に関与する基を言う。
 本明細書において、化学式中のMeはメチル基を、Etはエチル基を、Prはプロピル基を、Buはブチル基を、Phはフェニル基をそれぞれ示す。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量および数平均分子量は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフ(GPC)測定によるポリスチレン換算値として定義される。
Hereinafter, the contents of the present invention will be described in detail.
In the description of the group (atomic group) in this specification, the description which does not describe substitution and non-substitution includes what does not have a substituent and what has a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In this specification, light means actinic rays or radiation. “Actinic light” or “radiation” means, for example, an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and the like.
In this specification, “exposure” means not only exposure with far ultraviolet rays such as mercury lamps and excimer lasers, X-rays, EUV light, etc., but also drawing with electron beams, ion beams, etc. unless otherwise specified. Include in exposure.
In this specification, a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
In this specification, the total solid content refers to the total mass of components excluding the solvent from the total composition of the colored composition.
In this specification, “(meth) acrylate” represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate, and “(meth) acryl” represents both and / or acrylic and “(meth) acrylic”. ") Allyl" represents both and / or allyl and methallyl, and "(meth) acryloyl" represents both and / or acryloyl and methacryloyl.
In the present specification, the polymerizable compound refers to a compound having a polymerizable functional group, and may be a monomer or a polymer. The polymerizable functional group refers to a group that participates in a polymerization reaction.
In the present specification, Me in the chemical formula represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Pr represents a propyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
In this specification, the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in the term if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
In this specification, a weight average molecular weight and a number average molecular weight are defined as a polystyrene conversion value by a gel permeation chromatograph (GPC) measurement.
<着色組成物>
 本発明の着色組成物は、トリアリールメタン骨格を有する色素Aと、キサンテン骨格を有する色素Bと、硬化性化合物とを含み、色素Aおよび色素Bから選ばれる少なくとも一種が、色素多量体である。
 本発明の着色組成物は、上記構成とすることにより、分光特性および耐溶剤性が良好なカラーフィルタなどの硬化膜を形成することができる。すなわち、トリアリールメタン骨格を有する色素と、キサンテン骨格を有する色素とを併用することで、分光特性の良い硬化膜を形成できる。そして、トリアリールメタン骨格を有する色素、および、キサンテン骨格を有する色素から選ばれる少なくとも一つを、色素多量体とすることで、着色組成物を低温で硬化して硬化膜を形成した場合であっても、耐溶剤性に優れた硬化膜が得られる。更には、膜から色素が抜けにくくなり、他色との混色を抑制することもできる。
 また、本発明の着色組成物は、上記色素Aおよび上記色素Bが色素多量体であることが好ましい。トリアリールメタン骨格を有する色素と、キサンテン骨格を有する色素は、相溶性が良好で、会合状態を形成し難い。このため、色素同士の相分離を抑制して、溶剤の染み込みなどを抑制でき、優れた耐溶剤性が得られる。更には、両者を色素多量体とすることで、膜から色素がより抜け出しにくくなり、他色との混色を効果的に抑制できる。
 また、本発明の着色組成物は、上記色素Aのトリアリールメタン骨格のモル数と、上記色素Bのキサンテン骨格のモル数との比が、40:60~75:25であることが好ましい。両者の比が上記範囲であれば、硬化膜の耐溶剤性をより向上できる。また、他色との混色をより効果的に抑制できる。更には、膜成分のブリードアウト等の発生を抑制でき、膜の信頼性に優れる。
 また、本発明の着色組成物は、上記色素Aおよび上記色素Bから選ばれる少なくとも一種が、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン、トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンおよびテトラアリールボレートアニオンから選択されるアニオンを有することが好ましい。上記アニオンは、クロロアニオンなどと比べて塩交換が生じにくく、耐熱性に優れた硬化膜を形成できる。また、膜成分のブリードアウト等の発生を抑制でき、膜の信頼性に優れる。
 以下、本発明について詳細に説明する。
<Coloring composition>
The coloring composition of the present invention includes a dye A having a triarylmethane skeleton, a dye B having a xanthene skeleton, and a curable compound, and at least one selected from the dye A and the dye B is a dye multimer. .
The colored composition of the present invention can form a cured film such as a color filter having good spectral characteristics and solvent resistance by adopting the above-described configuration. That is, a cured film having good spectral characteristics can be formed by using a pigment having a triarylmethane skeleton and a pigment having a xanthene skeleton in combination. Then, at least one selected from a dye having a triarylmethane skeleton and a dye having a xanthene skeleton is a dye multimer, whereby the colored composition is cured at low temperature to form a cured film. However, a cured film having excellent solvent resistance can be obtained. Furthermore, it is difficult for the pigment to escape from the film, and color mixing with other colors can be suppressed.
In the colored composition of the present invention, the dye A and the dye B are preferably dye multimers. A dye having a triarylmethane skeleton and a dye having a xanthene skeleton have good compatibility and hardly form an association state. For this reason, the phase separation of the pigments can be suppressed, soaking of the solvent can be suppressed, and excellent solvent resistance can be obtained. Furthermore, by making both into a dye multimer, the dye is more difficult to escape from the film, and color mixing with other colors can be effectively suppressed.
In the colored composition of the present invention, the ratio of the number of moles of the triarylmethane skeleton of the dye A to the number of moles of the xanthene skeleton of the dye B is preferably 40:60 to 75:25. If the ratio of both is the said range, the solvent resistance of a cured film can be improved more. In addition, color mixing with other colors can be more effectively suppressed. Furthermore, generation | occurrence | production of the bleedout of a film | membrane component etc. can be suppressed and it is excellent in the reliability of a film | membrane.
In the colored composition of the present invention, at least one selected from the dye A and the dye B has an anion selected from a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, and a tetraarylborate anion. preferable. The anion is less susceptible to salt exchange than a chloroanion and can form a cured film having excellent heat resistance. Moreover, generation | occurrence | production of the bleed-out etc. of a film | membrane component can be suppressed and it is excellent in the reliability of a film | membrane.
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail.
<<着色剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、着色剤として、トリアリールメタン骨格を有する色素Aと、キサンテンメタン骨格を有する色素Bとを含む。本発明において、色素Aおよび色素Bから選ばれる少なくとも一種が、色素多量体であり、色素Aおよび色素Bが共に色素多量体であることが好ましい。
 なお、本発明において、色素多量体とは、トリアリールメタン骨格、または、キサンテン骨格を、一分子中に2以上有する化合物を意味する。
<< Colorant >>
The coloring composition of this invention contains the pigment | dye A which has a triarylmethane skeleton, and the pigment | dye B which has a xanthenemethane skeleton as a coloring agent. In the present invention, it is preferable that at least one selected from Dye A and Dye B is a dye multimer, and both Dye A and Dye B are dye multimers.
In the present invention, the dye multimer means a compound having two or more triarylmethane skeletons or xanthene skeletons in one molecule.
 本発明において、色素Aは、トリアリールメタン骨格を有するカチオン部と、アニオンとを有することが好ましい。また、色素Bは、キサンテン骨格を有するカチオン部と、アニオンとを有することが好ましい。
 本発明において、アニオンは、カチオン部の分子外に有していてもよいが、カチオン部と共有結合を介して結合していていることが好ましい。なお、アニオンが、カチオン部の分子外に有するとは、カチオン部とアニオンが共有結合を介して結合せず、別化合物として存在している場合をいう。以下、カチオン部の分子外のアニオンを対アニオンともいう。
 本発明において、色素Aは、キサンテン骨格を実質的に含まないことが好ましい。また、色素Bは、トリアリールメタン骨格を実質的に含まないことが好ましい。
In the present invention, the dye A preferably has a cation portion having a triarylmethane skeleton and an anion. Moreover, it is preferable that the pigment | dye B has a cation part which has a xanthene skeleton, and an anion.
In the present invention, the anion may be present outside the cation moiety molecule, but is preferably bound to the cation moiety via a covalent bond. In addition, that an anion has outside the molecule | numerator of a cation part means the case where a cation part and an anion do not couple | bond together through a covalent bond, but exist as another compound. Hereinafter, the anion outside the molecule of the cation moiety is also referred to as a counter anion.
In the present invention, it is preferable that the dye A does not substantially contain a xanthene skeleton. Moreover, it is preferable that the pigment | dye B does not contain a triarylmethane skeleton substantially.
 本発明において、着色組成物中における色素Aの含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分の5~60質量%が好ましい。上限は、55質量%以下がより好ましく、50質量%以下がさらに好ましい。下限は、10質量%以上がより好ましく、15質量%以上がさらに好ましい。
 本発明において、着色組成物中における色素Bの含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分の5~60質量%が好ましい。上限は、55質量%以下がより好ましく、50質量%以下がさらに好ましい。下限は、7.5質量%以上がより好ましく、10質量%以上がさらに好ましい。
 本発明において、着色剤全量中における色素Aと色素Bの合計量は、50~100質量%が好ましい。下限は、65質量%以上がより好ましく、70質量%以上がさらに好ましい。
 本発明において、色素Aのトリアリールメタン骨格のモル数と、色素Bのキサンテン骨格のモル数との比は、40:60~75:25が好ましく、45:55~65:35がより好ましい。両者の比が上記範囲であれば、硬化膜の耐溶剤性をより向上できる。また、他色との混色をより効果的に抑制できる。更には、膜成分のブリードアウト等の発生を抑制でき、膜の信頼性に優れる。
 なお、本発明において、色素Aのトリアリールメタン骨格のモル数は、色素Aが単量体である場合は、色素Aのモル数を意味する。また、色素Aが色素多量体である場合は、トリアリールメタン骨格以外の部分を除いた部位(例えば、後述する一般式(A)のDyeI、後述する一般式(C)のDyeIII、後述する一般式(D-1)のD)のモル数を意味する。色素Bのキサンテン骨格のモル数についても、同様である。
In the present invention, the content of the dye A in the colored composition is preferably 5 to 60% by mass based on the total solid content of the colored composition. The upper limit is more preferably 55% by mass or less, and further preferably 50% by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 10% by mass or more, and further preferably 15% by mass or more.
In the present invention, the content of the dye B in the coloring composition is preferably 5 to 60% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. The upper limit is more preferably 55% by mass or less, and further preferably 50% by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 7.5% by mass or more, and further preferably 10% by mass or more.
In the present invention, the total amount of the dye A and the dye B in the total amount of the colorant is preferably 50 to 100% by mass. The lower limit is more preferably 65% by mass or more, and further preferably 70% by mass or more.
In the present invention, the ratio of the number of moles of the triarylmethane skeleton of the dye A to the number of moles of the xanthene skeleton of the dye B is preferably 40:60 to 75:25, and more preferably 45:55 to 65:35. If the ratio of both is the said range, the solvent resistance of a cured film can be improved more. In addition, color mixing with other colors can be more effectively suppressed. Furthermore, generation | occurrence | production of the bleedout of a film | membrane component etc. can be suppressed and it is excellent in the reliability of a film | membrane.
In the present invention, the number of moles of the triarylmethane skeleton of the dye A means the number of moles of the dye A when the dye A is a monomer. Further, when the dye A is a dye multimer, a portion excluding a portion other than the triarylmethane skeleton (for example, DyeI of the general formula (A) described later, DyeIII of the general formula (C) described later, It means the number of moles of D) in the formula (D-1). The same applies to the number of moles of the xanthene skeleton of dye B.
 本発明において、色素Aおよび色素Bから選ばれる少なくとも一種が、重合性不飽和二重結合を有する基(以下、単に、「重合性基」ともいう)を含むことが好ましく、両者が、重合性基を含むことがより好ましい。このような構成とすることにより、耐溶剤性がより向上する傾向にある。また、他色との混色がより生じ難くなる。更には、膜成分のブリードアウト等の発生を抑制できる。
 重合性基は、1分子中に2個以上含むことが好ましい。重合性基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、および(メタ)アクリロイル基が挙げられ、(メタ)アクリロイル基が好ましい。
In the present invention, it is preferable that at least one selected from Dye A and Dye B includes a group having a polymerizable unsaturated double bond (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “polymerizable group”). More preferably, it contains a group. By setting it as such a structure, it exists in the tendency for solvent resistance to improve more. In addition, color mixing with other colors is less likely to occur. Furthermore, generation | occurrence | production of the bleed-out etc. of a membrane component can be suppressed.
It is preferable that two or more polymerizable groups are contained in one molecule. Examples of the polymerizable group include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable.
<<<トリアリールメタン骨格を有する色素A>>>
 本発明において、トリアリールメタン骨格を有する色素Aとしては、下記式(TP)で表される構造が例示される。
<<< Dye A having a triarylmethane skeleton >>>
In the present invention, the dye A having a triarylmethane skeleton is exemplified by a structure represented by the following formula (TP).
式(TP)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
Formula (TP)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
 式(TP)中、Rtp1~Rtp4は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。Rtp5は、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはNRtp9Rtp10(Rtp9およびRtp10は水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す)を表す。Rtp6、Rtp7およびRtp8は、置換基を表す。a、bおよびcは、0~4の整数を表す。a、bおよびcが2以上の場合、Rtp6、Rtp7およびRtp8は、それぞれ連結して環を形成してもよい。X-はアニオン構造を表す。X-が存在しない場合は、Rtp1~Rtp7の少なくとも1つがアニオンを含む。 In the formula (TP), Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group. Rtp 5 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or NRtp 9 Rtp 10 (Rtp 9 and Rtp 10 represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group). Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 and Rtp 8 represent a substituent. a, b and c each represents an integer of 0 to 4. When a, b and c are 2 or more, Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 and Rtp 8 may be linked to each other to form a ring. X represents an anion structure. When X is not present, at least one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 7 contains an anion.
 色素Aが色素多量体である場合、式(TP)中、Rtp1~Rtp10のいずれか1つを介して、色素多量体の他の部位(好ましくは、後述する一般式(A)のL1または後述する一般式(1)のR2)と結合していることが好ましく、より好ましくは、Rtp5を介して、色素多量体の他の部位と結合している。 When the dye A is a dye multimer, in the formula (TP), through one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 10 , another part of the dye multimer (preferably L in the general formula (A) described later) 1 or R 2 ) of the general formula (1) described later is preferably bonded, and more preferably bonded to another part of the dye multimer via Rtp 5 .
 Rtp1~Rtp6として、好ましくは水素原子、炭素数1~5の直鎖または分岐のアルキル基およびフェニル基が好ましい。Rtp5は、水素原子またはNRtp9Rtp10が好ましく、NRtp9Rtp10が特に好ましい。Rtp9およびRtp10は、水素原子、炭素数1~5の直鎖若しくは分岐のアルキル基またはフェニル基が好ましい。Rtp6、Rtp7およびRtp8が表す置換基は、特開2014-237809号公報の段落番号0042~0053に記載の置換基群Aが挙げられるが、特に、炭素数1~5の直鎖若しくは分岐のアルキル基、炭素数1~5のアルケニル基、炭素数6~15のアリール基、カルボキシル基またはスルホ基が好ましく、炭素数1~5の直鎖若しくは分岐のアルキル基、炭素数1~5のアルケニル基、フェニル基またはカルボキシル基がさらに好ましい。特に、Rtp6、Rtp8は、炭素数1~5のアルキル基が好ましく、Rtp7は、アルケニル基(特に隣接した2つのアルケニル基が連結したフェニル基が好ましい)、フェニル基またはカルボキシル基が好ましい。
 a、bまたはcは、それぞれ独立に0~4の整数を表す。特にaおよびcは、それぞれ、0または1が好ましく、0がより好ましい。bは0~2の整数が好ましく、0または2がより好ましい。
Rtp 1 to Rtp 6 are preferably a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and a phenyl group. Rtp 5 is preferably a hydrogen atom or NRtp 9 Rtp 10 , particularly preferably NRtp 9 Rtp 10 . Rtp 9 and Rtp 10 are preferably a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or a phenyl group. Examples of the substituent represented by Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 and Rtp 8 include the substituent group A described in paragraph Nos. 0042 to 0053 of JP-A-2014-237809. A branched alkyl group, an alkenyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 15 carbon atoms, a carboxyl group or a sulfo group is preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Of these, an alkenyl group, a phenyl group or a carboxyl group is more preferred. In particular, Rtp 6 and Rtp 8 are preferably alkyl groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and Rtp 7 is preferably an alkenyl group (particularly a phenyl group in which two adjacent alkenyl groups are linked), a phenyl group or a carboxyl group. .
a, b or c each independently represents an integer of 0 to 4; In particular, a and c are each preferably 0 or 1, more preferably 0. b is preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 2.
 Rtp1~Rtp7の少なくとも1つがアニオンを含む場合、アニオンとしては、-SO3 -、-COO-、-PO4 -、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン、トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンおよびテトラアリールボレートアニオンが好ましく、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン、トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンおよびテトラアリールボレートアニオンがより好ましく、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオンおよびトリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンが更に好ましい。
 具体的には、Rtp1~Rtp7の少なくとも1つが、一般式(P)で置換された構造が挙げられる。
一般式(P)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

 一般式(P)中、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、X1は、アニオンを表す。
When at least one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 7 contains an anion, examples of the anion include —SO 3 , —COO , —PO 4 , bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, tris (sulfonyl) methide anion and tetraarylborate anion. Preferably, bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, tris (sulfonyl) methide anion and tetraarylborate anion are more preferable, and bis (sulfonyl) imide anion and tris (sulfonyl) methide anion are still more preferable.
Specifically, a structure in which at least one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 7 is substituted with the general formula (P) can be given.
General formula (P)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

In general formula (P), L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and X 1 represents an anion.
 一般式(P)中、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、-NR10-、-O-、-SO2-、置換基(例えばハロゲン原子、水酸基が挙げられ、好ましくはフッ素原子)を含んでいてもよいアルキレン基、置換基(例えばハロゲン原子、水酸基が挙げられ、好ましくはフッ素原子)を含んでいてもよいアリーレン基またはこれらの組み合わせからなる基を表すことが好ましい。特に、-NR10-と-SO2とフッ素原子を含むアルキレン基との組み合わせからなる基、-O-とフッ素原子を含むアリーレン基との組み合わせからなる基、または、-NR10-と-SO2とフッ素原子を含むアルキレン基との組み合わせからなる基が好ましい。
 -NR10-において、R10は、水素原子または炭素数1~5のアルキル基を表し、水素原子が好ましい。
 アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~3がさらに好ましい。フッ素原子を含むアルキレン基としては、パーフルオロアルキレン基がより好ましい。フッ素原子を含むアルキレン基の具体例としては、ジフルオロメチレン基、テトラフルオロエチレン基、ヘキサフルオロプロピレン基などが挙げられる。
 アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~14がより好ましく、6~10がさらに好ましい。フッ素原子を含むアリーレン基の具体例としては、テトラフルオロフェニレン基、ヘキサフルオロ-1-ナフチレン基、ヘキサフルオロ-2-ナフチレン基などが挙げられる。
In general formula (P), L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include —NR 10 —, —O—, —SO 2 —, an alkylene group which may contain a substituent (for example, a halogen atom and a hydroxyl group, preferably a fluorine atom), and a substituent. It is preferable to represent an arylene group which may contain (for example, a halogen atom or a hydroxyl group, preferably a fluorine atom) or a group consisting of a combination thereof. In particular, a group consisting of a combination of —NR 10 —, —SO 2 and an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom, a group consisting of a combination of —O— and an arylene group containing a fluorine atom, or —NR 10 — and —SO A group consisting of a combination of 2 and an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom is preferred.
In —NR 10 —, R 10 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, preferably a hydrogen atom.
The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkylene group containing a fluorine atom is more preferably a perfluoroalkylene group. Specific examples of the alkylene group containing a fluorine atom include a difluoromethylene group, a tetrafluoroethylene group, and a hexafluoropropylene group.
The carbon number of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 14, and further preferably 6 to 10. Specific examples of the arylene group containing a fluorine atom include a tetrafluorophenylene group, a hexafluoro-1-naphthylene group, and a hexafluoro-2-naphthylene group.
 一般式(P)中、X1は、アニオンを表し、-SO3 -、-COO-、-PO4 -、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン、トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンおよびテトラアリールボレートアニオンから選ばれる1種が好ましく、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン、トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンおよびテトラアリールボレートアニオンから選ばれる1種がより好ましく、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオンまたはトリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンが更に好ましい。 In general formula (P), X 1 represents an anion and is selected from —SO 3 , —COO , —PO 4 , a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion and a tetraarylborate anion. Species are preferred, one kind selected from bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, tris (sulfonyl) methide anion and tetraarylborate anion is more preferred, and bis (sulfonyl) imide anion or tris (sulfonyl) methide anion is still more preferred.
Rtp1~Rtp7の少なくとも1つがアニオンを含む場合、Rtp1~Rtp7の少なくとも1つが、一般式(P-1)で置換された構造も好ましい。
 一般式(P-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

 一般式(P-1)中、L1は、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、単結合であることが好ましい。L1が表す2価の連結基としては、炭素数1~6のアルキレン基、炭素数6~12のアリーレン基、-O-、-S-、またはこれらの組み合わせからなる基等が挙げられる。
 L2は、-SO2-または-CO-を表す。
 Gは、炭素原子または窒素原子を表す。
 n1は、Gが炭素原子の場合2を表し、Gが窒素原子の場合1を表す。
 R6は、フッ素原子を含むアルキル基またはフッ素原子を含むアリール基を表す。n1が2の場合、2つのR6はそれぞれ同一でも異なっていても良い。
 R6が表すフッ素原子を含むアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~3がさらに好ましい。
 R6が表すフッ素原子を含むアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~14がより好ましく、6~10がさらに好ましい。
When at least one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 7 contains an anion, a structure in which at least one of Rtp 1 to Rtp 7 is substituted with the general formula (P-1) is also preferable.
Formula (P-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

In general formula (P-1), L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and is preferably a single bond. Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L 1 include an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, —O—, —S—, or a group composed of a combination thereof.
L 2 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—.
G represents a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
n1 represents 2 when G is a carbon atom, and represents 1 when G is a nitrogen atom.
R 6 represents an alkyl group containing a fluorine atom or an aryl group containing a fluorine atom. When n1 is 2, two R 6 may be the same or different.
The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group containing a fluorine atom represented by R 6 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6, and still more preferably 1 to 3.
The number of carbon atoms of the aryl group containing a fluorine atom represented by R 6 is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 14, and still more preferably 6 to 10.
 なお、色素Aにおいてカチオンは、以下のように非局在化して存在している。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
In the dye A, the cation is delocalized as follows.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
<<<キサンテン骨格を有する色素B>>>
 本発明において、キサンテン骨格を有する色素Bとしては、下記式(J)で表される構造が例示される。
<<< Dye B having xanthene skeleton >>>
In the present invention, examples of the dye B having a xanthene skeleton include a structure represented by the following formula (J).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 式(J)中、R81、R82、R83およびR84は、各々独立に、水素原子または1価の置換基を表し、R85は、各々独立に1価の置換基を表し、mは、0~5の整数を表す。X-は、対アニオンを表す。X-が存在しない場合は、R81~R85の少なくとも1つがアニオンを含む。 In formula (J), R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, R 85 each independently represents a monovalent substituent, m Represents an integer of 0 to 5. X represents a counter anion. When X is not present, at least one of R 81 to R 85 contains an anion.
 色素Bが色素多量体である場合、式(J)中、R81~R85のいずれか1つを介して、色素多量体の他の部位(好ましくは、後述する一般式(A)のL1または後述する一般式(1)のR2)と結合していることが好ましく、より好ましくは、R85を介して色素多量体の他の部位と結合している。 When the dye B is a dye multimer, another part of the dye multimer (preferably L in the general formula (A) to be described later) is bonded via any one of R 81 to R 85 in the formula (J). 1 or R 2 ) of the general formula (1) described later is preferably bonded, and more preferably bonded to another part of the dye multimer via R 85 .
 式(J)におけるR81~R85が取りうる置換基は、特開2014-237809号公報の段落番号0042~0053に記載の置換基群Aが挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれることとする。
 式(J)中のR81とR82、R83とR84、およびmが2以上の場合のR85同士は、各々独立に、互いに結合して5員、6員若しくは7員の飽和環、または5員、6員若しくは7員の不飽和環を形成していてもよい。形成する環としては、例えば、ピロール環、フラン環、チオフェン環、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環、トリアゾール環、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピロリジン環、ピペリジン環、シクロペンテン環、シクロヘキセン環、ベンゼン環、ピリジン環、ピラジン環、ピリダジン環が挙げられ、好ましくは、ベンゼン環、ピリジン環が挙げられる。
 形成される環が、さらに置換可能な基である場合には、R81~R85で説明した置換基で置換されていてもよく、2個以上の置換基で置換されている場合には、それらの置換基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
Examples of the substituent that can be taken by R 81 to R 85 in formula (J) include substituent group A described in paragraph Nos. 0042 to 0053 of JP-A-2014-237809, the contents of which are incorporated herein. I will do it.
R 81 and R 82 in formula (J), R 83 and R 84 , and R 85 in the case where m is 2 or more are each independently bonded to each other to form a 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered saturated ring. Or a 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered unsaturated ring. As the ring to be formed, for example, pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrrolidine ring, piperidine ring, cyclopentene ring, cyclohexene ring, benzene ring, pyridine ring, A pyrazine ring and a pyridazine ring are mentioned, Preferably a benzene ring and a pyridine ring are mentioned.
When the ring formed is a further substitutable group, it may be substituted with the substituents described for R 81 to R 85 , and when it is substituted with two or more substituents, These substituents may be the same or different.
 式(J)において、R82およびR83は水素原子または置換または無置換のアルキル基であり、R81およびR84は置換または無置換のアルキル基またはフェニル基であることが好ましい。また、R85はハロゲン原子、炭素数1~5の直鎖または分岐のアルキル基、スルホ基、スルホンアミド基、カルボキシル基、アミド基であることが好ましく、スルホ基、スルホンアミド基、カルボキシル基、アミド基であることがさらに好ましい。R85はキサンテン環と連結した炭素の隣接部に結合することが好ましい。R81およびR84のフェニル基が有する置換基は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素数1~5の直鎖または分岐のアルキル基、スルホ基、スルホンアミド基、カルボキシル基であることが特に好ましい。 In the formula (J), R 82 and R 83 are preferably a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, and R 81 and R 84 are preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group or a phenyl group. R 85 is preferably a halogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a sulfo group, a sulfonamide group, a carboxyl group, or an amide group. The sulfo group, the sulfonamide group, the carboxyl group, More preferred is an amide group. R 85 is preferably bonded to the adjacent part of carbon linked to the xanthene ring. The substituent that the phenyl group of R 81 and R 84 has is particularly preferably a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a sulfo group, a sulfonamide group, or a carboxyl group.
 R81~R85の少なくとも1つがアニオンを含む場合、アニオンとしては、上述したアニオンが挙げられる。 When at least one of R 81 to R 85 contains an anion, examples of the anion include the anions described above.
 式(J)で表されるキサンテン骨格を有する化合物は、文献記載の方法で合成することができる。具体的には、テトラへドロン レターズ、2003年、vol.44、No.23、4355~4360頁、テトラへドロン、2005年、vol.61、No.12、3097~3106頁などに記載の方法を適用することができる。 The compound having a xanthene skeleton represented by the formula (J) can be synthesized by a method described in the literature. Specifically, the methods described in Tetrahedron Letters, 2003, vol. 44, No. 23, pages 4355-4360, Tetrahedron, 2005, vol. 61, No. 12, pages 3097-3106, etc. Can be applied.
 X-が、アニオンを表す場合、後述の対アニオンが別分子の場合の記載を参酌できる。
また、X-が存在せず、R81、R82、R83およびR84の少なくとも1つがアニオンを含む場合、対アニオンが同一構成単位内にある場合の記載を参酌できる。
When X represents an anion, the description in the case where the counter anion described later is a different molecule can be referred to.
In addition, when X does not exist and at least one of R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 contains an anion, the description of the case where the counter anion is in the same structural unit can be referred to.
 なお、色素Bにおいてカチオンは、以下のように非局在化して存在している。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
In the dye B, the cation is delocalized as follows.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
<<<対アニオン>>>
 本発明において、色素Aおよび/または色素Bが、カチオン部と対アニオンとで構成される場合、対アニオンとしては特に制限は無いが、耐熱性の観点で非求核性のアニオンであることが好ましい。非求核性のアニオンとしては、特開2007-310315号公報の段落番号0075等に記載の公知の非求核性アニオンが好ましい。ここで、非求核性とは、加熱により色素を求核攻撃しない性質を意味する。
 対アニオンとしては、スルホン酸アニオン、カルボン酸アニオン、スルホニルイミドアニオン、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン、トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオン、カルボン酸アニオン、テトラアリールボレードアニオン、-CON-CO-、-CON-SO2-、BF4 -、PF6 -、SbF6 -、B-(CN)3OCH3から選ばれる少なくとも一種であることが好ましい。より好ましくは、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン、トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンおよびテトラアリールボレートアニオンから選ばれる少なくとも一種であり、さらに好ましくは、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオンおよびトリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンから選ばれる少なくとも一種である。
 対アニオンは、下記(AN-1)~(AN-5)で表される構造を有する非求核性アニオンであることがより好ましい。
<<< Counter anion >>>
In the present invention, when dye A and / or dye B is composed of a cation moiety and a counter anion, the counter anion is not particularly limited, but may be a non-nucleophilic anion from the viewpoint of heat resistance. preferable. As the non-nucleophilic anion, known non-nucleophilic anions described in JP-A-2007-310315, paragraph No. 0075 and the like are preferable. Here, the non-nucleophilic property means a property that does not nucleophilic attack the dye by heating.
As the counter anion, sulfonate anion, carboxylate anion, sulfonylimide anion, bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, carboxylate anion, tetra aryl volley de anion, -CON - CO -, - CON - SO 2 −, BF 4 , PF 6 , SbF 6 , B (CN) 3 OCH 3 is preferable. More preferably, it is at least one selected from a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion and a tetraarylborate anion, and more preferably at least one selected from a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion and a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion. It is.
The counter anion is more preferably a non-nucleophilic anion having a structure represented by the following (AN-1) to (AN-5).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 式(AN-1)中、X1およびX2は、それぞれ独立に、フッ素原子またはフッ素原子を有する炭素数1~10のアルキル基を表す。X1およびX2は互いに結合して環を形成しても良い。
 X1およびX2は、それぞれ独立に、フッ素原子またはフッ素原子を有する炭素数1~10のアルキル基を表し、フッ素原子またはフッ素原子を有する炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~10のペルフルオロアルキル基であることがより好ましく、炭素数1~4のペルフルオロアルキル基であることがさらに好ましく、トリフルオロメチル基が特に好ましい。
In formula (AN-1), X 1 and X 2 each independently represent a fluorine atom or a C 1-10 alkyl group having a fluorine atom. X 1 and X 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
X 1 and X 2 each independently represent a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having a fluorine atom, preferably a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having a fluorine atom, More preferred is a perfluoroalkyl group of ˜10, more preferred is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and a trifluoromethyl group is particularly preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 式(AN-2)中、X3、X4およびX5はそれぞれ独立に、フッ素原子または炭素数1~10のフッ素原子を有するアルキル基を表す。
 X3、X4およびX5は、それぞれ独立に、X1およびX2と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同義である。
In formula (AN-2), X 3 , X 4 and X 5 each independently represent a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
X 3 , X 4 and X 5 are each independently the same as X 1 and X 2 , and the preferred range is also the same.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 式(AN-3)中、X6は炭素数1~10のフッ素原子を有するアルキル基を表す。
 X6は、炭素数1~10のペルフルオロアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~
4のペルフルオロアルキル基であることがさらに好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
In the formula (AN-3), X 6 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
X 6 is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms,
More preferably, it is a 4 perfluoroalkyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 式(AN-4)中、X7は炭素数1~10のフッ素原子を有するアルキレン基を表す。
 X7は、炭素数1~10のペルフルオロアルキレン基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~4のペルフルオロアルキレン基であることがさらに好ましい。
In formula (AN-4), X 7 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
X 7 is preferably a perfluoroalkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably a perfluoroalkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 式(AN-5)中、Ar1、Ar2、Ar3およびAr4は、それぞれ独立に、アリール基を表す。
 Ar1、Ar2、Ar3およびAr4は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数6~20のアリール基が好ましく、炭素数6~14のアリール基がより好ましく、炭素数6~10のアリール基がさらに好ましい。
 Ar1、Ar2、Ar3およびAr4が表わすアリール基は、置換基を有しても良い。置換基を有する場合、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、カルボニル基、カルボニルオキシ基、カルバモイル基、スルホ基、スルホンアミド基、ニトロ基等が挙げられ、ハロゲン原子およびアルキル基が好ましく、フッ素原子、アルキル基がより好ましく、フッ素原子、炭素数1~4のペルフルオロアルキル基がさらに好ましい。
 Ar1、Ar2、Ar3およびAr4は、それぞれ独立に、ハロゲン原子および/またはハロゲン原子を有するアルキル基を有するフェニル基がより好ましく、フッ素原子および/またはフッ素を有するアルキル基を有するフェニル基がさらに好ましい。
In formula (AN-5), Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 each independently represents an aryl group.
Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 are each independently preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and further an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms preferable.
The aryl group represented by Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 may have a substituent. In the case of having a substituent, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, a carbonyl group, a carbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfonamide group, a nitro group and the like can be mentioned, and a halogen atom and an alkyl group are preferable, A fluorine atom and an alkyl group are more preferable, and a fluorine atom and a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms are more preferable.
Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 are each independently more preferably a phenyl group having a halogen atom and / or an alkyl group having a halogen atom, and a phenyl group having a fluorine atom and / or an alkyl group having fluorine. Is more preferable.
 非求核性の対アニオンは、また、-B(CN)n1(ORa4-n1(Raは炭素数1~10のアルキル基または炭素数6~10のアリール基を表し、n1は1~4の整数を表す)であることが好ましい。炭素数1~10のアルキル基としてのRaは、炭素数1~6のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルキル基がより好ましい。炭素数6~10のアリール基としてのRaは、フェニル基、ナフチル基が好ましい。
 n1は、1~3が好ましく、1~2がより好ましい。
The non-nucleophilic counter anion is also —B (CN) n1 (OR a ) 4-n1 (R a represents an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and n1 represents It is preferably an integer of 1 to 4. Ra as the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. R a as the aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group.
n1 is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 to 2.
 非求核性の対アニオンは、さらにまた、-PF6P (6-n2) -(RPは炭素数1~10のフッ素化アルキル基を表し、n2は1~6の整数を表す)であることが好ましい。RPは、炭素数1~6のフッ素原子を有するアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~4のフッ素を有するアルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数1~3のペルフルオロアルキル基がさらに好ましい。
 n2は、1~4の整数が好ましく、1または2がより好ましい。
The non-nucleophilic counter anion is further —PF 6 R P (6-n2) (R P represents a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and n2 represents an integer of 1 to 6) It is preferable that R P is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and further preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
n2 is preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 or 2.
 非求核性対アニオンの1分子あたりの質量は、100~1,000が好ましく、200~500がより好ましい。
 以下に、非求核性の対アニオンの具体例を示すが本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。
The mass per molecule of the non-nucleophilic counter anion is preferably 100 to 1,000, and more preferably 200 to 500.
Specific examples of the non-nucleophilic counter anion are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
(色素多量体)
 次に、色素多量体の好ましい実施形態を説明する。以下、トリアリールメタン骨格とキサンテン骨格を併せて色素骨格ともいう。
 トリアリールメタン骨格を有する色素(色素A)が多量体である場合の具体例としては、特開2015-83652号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれることとする。また、色素多量体の製造方法は特に限定されず、適宜適切な方法を選べばよいが、例えば特開2015-83652号公報に記載の方法で製造することができる。
 本発明において、色素多量体は、後述する一般式(A)で表される繰り返し単位を有する色素多量体(色素多量体(A)ともいう)、後述する一般式(B)で表される繰り返し単位を有する色素多量体(色素多量体(B)ともいう)、後述する一般式(C)で表される繰り返し単位を有する色素多量体(色素多量体(C)ともいう)、および、一般式(D)で表される色素多量体(色素多量体(D)ともいう)が好ましい。色素多量体(A)、色素多量体(C)および色素多量体(D)がより好ましく、信頼性に優れた硬化膜が得られ易いという理由から、色素多量体(A)および色素多量体(D)が特に好ましい。以下、色素多量体について詳細に説明する。
(Dye multimer)
Next, a preferred embodiment of the dye multimer will be described. Hereinafter, the triarylmethane skeleton and the xanthene skeleton are collectively referred to as a dye skeleton.
Specific examples of the case where the dye having a triarylmethane skeleton (Dye A) is a multimer include compounds described in JP-A-2015-83652. This content is incorporated herein. The method for producing the dye multimer is not particularly limited, and an appropriate method may be selected as appropriate. For example, it can be produced by the method described in JP-A-2015-83652.
In the present invention, the dye multimer includes a dye multimer (also referred to as a dye multimer (A)) having a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A) described later, and a repeat represented by the general formula (B) described later. A dye multimer having a unit (also referred to as a dye multimer (B)), a dye multimer having a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (C) (also referred to as a dye multimer (C)), and a general formula The dye multimer represented by (D) (also referred to as dye multimer (D)) is preferred. The dye multimer (A), the dye multimer (C), and the dye multimer (D) are more preferable, and the dye multimer (A) and the dye multimer ( D) is particularly preferred. Hereinafter, the dye multimer will be described in detail.
<<<色素多量体(A)>>>
 色素多量体(A)は、下式一般式(A)で表される繰り返し単位を含む。色素多量体(A)は、下記一般式(A)で表される繰り返し単位の割合が、色素多量体を構成する全繰り返し単位の10~100質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、20質量%以上がより好ましく、30質量%以上が更に好ましく、50質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、95質量%以下がより好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
一般式(A)中、X1は重合によって形成される連結基を表し、L1は単結合または2価の連結基を表す。DyeIは、トリアリールメタン骨格またはキサンテン骨格を有する基を表す。
<<< Dye Multimer (A) >>>
The dye multimer (A) includes a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (A). In the dye multimer (A), the ratio of the repeating unit represented by the following general formula (A) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass of the total repeating units constituting the dye multimer. The lower limit is more preferably 20% by mass or more, further preferably 30% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 50% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 95% by mass or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
In general formula (A), X 1 represents a linking group formed by polymerization, and L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. DyeI represents a group having a triarylmethane skeleton or a xanthene skeleton.
 一般式(A)中、X1は重合によって形成される連結基を表す。すなわち、X1は繰り返し単位の主鎖を表す。X1としては、公知の重合可能なモノマーから形成される連結基であれば制限ない。下記(XX-1)~(XX-30)で表される連結基が挙げられ、下記(XX-1)~(XX-24)で表される連結基が好ましく、(XX-1)、(XX-2)、(XX-10)~(XX-17)、(XX-18)、(XX-19)および(XX-24)から選択されることがより好ましく、(XX-1)、(XX-2)、(XX-10)~(XX-17)および(XX-24)から選択されることがさらに好ましく、(XX-1)、(XX-2)および(XX-11)から選択されることが特に好ましい。
 式中、*で示された部位でL1と連結していることを表す。Meはメチル基を表す。また、(XX-18)および(XX-19)中のRは、水素原子、炭素数1~5のアルキル基またはフェニル基を表す。
In general formula (A), X 1 represents a linking group formed by polymerization. That is, X 1 represents the main chain of the repeating unit. X 1 is not limited as long as it is a linking group formed from a known polymerizable monomer. Linking groups represented by the following (XX-1) to (XX-30) are exemplified, and linking groups represented by the following (XX-1) to (XX-24) are preferred, and (XX-1), ( XX-2), (XX-10) to (XX-17), (XX-18), (XX-19) and (XX-24), more preferably selected from (XX-1), (XX More preferably selected from (XX-2), (XX-10) to (XX-17) and (XX-24), selected from (XX-1), (XX-2) and (XX-11) It is particularly preferred that
In the formula, it is linked to L 1 at the site indicated by *. Me represents a methyl group. R in (XX-18) and (XX-19) represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or a phenyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 L1は単結合または2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、炭素数1~30のアルキレン基、炭素数6~30のアリーレン基、ヘテロ環連結基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-CO2-、-NR-、-CONR-、-O2C-、-SO-、-SO2-およびこれらを2個以上連結して形成される連結基、下式(L-1)で表される基が挙げられる。ここで、Rは、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019

 式(L-1)中、*1で示された部位で式(A)のX1と連結し、*2で示された部位で、式(A)のDyeIと連結する。
L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH═CH—, —O—, —S—, —C (═O )-, -CO 2- , -NR-, -CONR-, -O 2 C-, -SO-, -SO 2 -and a linking group formed by linking two or more of these, (L- The group represented by 1) is mentioned. Here, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019

In formula (L-1), it is linked to X 1 of formula (A) at the site indicated by * 1, and is linked to DyeI of formula (A) at the site indicated by * 2.
 L11は、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、炭素数1~6のアルキレン基、炭素数6~18のアリーレン基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO2-、-NRAB-またはこれらの組み合わせからなる基等が挙げられる。アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状または環状のいずれであってもよい。アリーレン基は、単環であっても多環であってもよい。-NRAB-において、RAおよびRBは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子または炭素数1~6のアルキル基を表し、RAおよびRBが互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。
 L12は、-SO2-または-CO-を表す。
 L13は、2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、L11で説明した基が挙げられ、炭素数6~18のアリーレン基(好ましくはフェニレン基)、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-NRAB-またはこれらの組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、フェニレン基と-O-と-CO-との組み合わせからなる基がより好ましい。
 Gは、炭素原子または窒素原子を表す。
 n2は、Gが炭素原子の場合1を表し、Gが窒素原子の場合0を表す。
 R7Aは、フッ素原子を含むアルキレン基またはフッ素原子を含むアリーレン基を表す。アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~3がさらに好ましい。アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~14がより好ましく、6~10がさらに好ましい。
 R7Bは、フッ素原子を含むアルキル基またはフッ素原子を含むアリール基を表す。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~3がさらに好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~14がより好ましく、6~10がさらに好ましい。
L 11 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, —O—, —CO—, —S—, —SO 2 —, —NR A R B — or Examples include groups composed of these combinations. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The arylene group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. In —NR A R B —, R A and R B each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and R A and R B are bonded to each other to form a ring. Also good.
L 12 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—.
L 13 represents a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include the groups described for L 11 , an arylene group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms (preferably a phenylene group), —O—, —CO—, —S—, —NR A R B -Or a group consisting of a combination thereof is preferred, and a group consisting of a combination of a phenylene group, -O- and -CO- is more preferred.
G represents a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
n2 represents 1 when G is a carbon atom, and represents 0 when G is a nitrogen atom.
R 7A represents an alkylene group containing a fluorine atom or an arylene group containing a fluorine atom. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The carbon number of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 14, and further preferably 6 to 10.
R 7B represents an alkyl group containing a fluorine atom or an aryl group containing a fluorine atom. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
 一般式(A)で表される繰り返し単位を含む色素多量体は、(1)色素骨格を有するモノマーを付加重合により合成する方法、(2)イソシアネート基、酸無水物基またはエポキシ基等の高反応性官能基を有するポリマーと、高反応性基と反応可能な官能基(ヒドロキシル基、一級または二級アミノ基、カルボキシル基等)を有する色素とを反応させる方法により合成できる。
 付加重合には公知の付加重合(ラジカル重合、アニオン重合、カチオン重合)が適用できるが、このうち、特にラジカル重合により合成することが反応条件を穏和化でき、色素骨格を分解させないため好ましい。ラジカル重合には、公知の反応条件を適用することができる。
 一般式(A)で表される繰り返し単位を有する色素多量体は、耐熱性の観点から、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する色素単量体を用いてラジカル重合して得られたラジカル重合体であることが好ましい。
The dye multimer containing the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A) includes (1) a method of synthesizing a monomer having a dye skeleton by addition polymerization, and (2) an isocyanate group, an acid anhydride group, an epoxy group or the like It can be synthesized by a method in which a polymer having a reactive functional group is reacted with a dye having a functional group (hydroxyl group, primary or secondary amino group, carboxyl group, etc.) capable of reacting with a highly reactive group.
Known addition polymerizations (radical polymerization, anionic polymerization, and cationic polymerization) can be applied to the addition polymerization. Among these, synthesis by radical polymerization is particularly preferable because the reaction conditions can be moderated and the dye skeleton is not decomposed. Known reaction conditions can be applied to the radical polymerization.
The dye multimer having the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A) is a radical polymer obtained by radical polymerization using a dye monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond from the viewpoint of heat resistance. It is preferable.
(他の繰り返し単位)
 本発明における色素多量体は、一般式(A)で表される繰り返し単位の他に、他の繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。他の繰り返し単位は、重合性基、酸基等の官能基を含んでいてもよい。官能基を含んでいなくてもよい。色素多量体は、酸基を有する繰り返し単位および重合性基を有する繰り返し単位から選ばれる1種以上を有することが好ましく、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことがさらに好ましい。
(Other repeat units)
The dye multimer in the present invention may contain other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A). Other repeating units may contain a functional group such as a polymerizable group or an acid group. It does not have to contain a functional group. The dye multimer preferably has at least one selected from a repeating unit having an acid group and a repeating unit having a polymerizable group, and more preferably includes a repeating unit having an acid group.
 重合性基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基および(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基が挙げられ、(メタ)アクリロイル基および(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基が好ましい。
 重合性基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、色素多量体を構成する全繰り返し単位の0~50質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、1質量%以上がより好ましく、3質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、35質量%以下がより好ましく、30質量%以下が更に好ましい。
Examples of the polymerizable group include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group and a (meth) acryloyloxy group, and a (meth) acryloyl group and a (meth) acryloyloxy group are preferable.
The ratio of the repeating unit having a polymerizable group is preferably 0 to 50% by mass of all repeating units constituting the dye multimer. The lower limit is more preferably 1% by mass or more, and still more preferably 3% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 35% by mass or less, and still more preferably 30% by mass or less.
 酸基としては、カルボキシル基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基が例示される。酸基は1種類のみ含まれていても良いし、2種類以上含まれていても良い。
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、色素多量体を構成する全繰り返し単位の0~50質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、1質量%以上がより好ましく、3質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、35質量%以下がより好ましく、30質量%以下が更に好ましい。
Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group. Only one type of acid group may be included, or two or more types of acid groups may be included.
The ratio of the repeating unit having an acid group is preferably 0 to 50% by mass of all repeating units constituting the dye multimer. The lower limit is more preferably 1% by mass or more, and still more preferably 3% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 35% by mass or less, and still more preferably 30% by mass or less.
 その他の官能基として、2~20個の無置換のアルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しからなる基、ラクトン、酸無水物、アミド、シアノ基等の現像促進基、長鎖および環状アルキル基、アラルキル基、アリール基、ポリアルキレンオキシド基、ヒドロキシル基、マレイミド基、アミノ基等の親疏水性調整基等が挙げられ、適宜導入することができる。
 2~20個の無置換のアルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しからなる基において、アルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しの数は、2~10個が好ましく、2~15個がより好ましく、2~10個がさらに好ましい。1つのアルキレンオキシ鎖は、-(CH2nO-で表され、nは整数であるが、nは1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、2または3がさらに好ましい。
Other functional groups include groups consisting of repeating 2 to 20 unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains, development promoting groups such as lactones, acid anhydrides, amides, cyano groups, long chain and cyclic alkyl groups, aralkyl groups, aryls Groups, polyalkylene oxide groups, hydroxyl groups, maleimide groups, amino group and other hydrophilicity-adjusting groups, and the like, which can be appropriately introduced.
In the group consisting of repeating 2 to 20 unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains, the number of repeating alkyleneoxy chains is preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 15, and even more preferably 2 to 10. One alkyleneoxy chain is represented by — (CH 2 ) n O—, where n is an integer, n is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 2 or 3.
 他の繰り返し単位の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Although the specific example of another repeating unit is shown, this invention is not limited to this.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
<<<色素多量体(B)>>>
 色素多量体(B)は、トリアリールメタン骨格またはキサンテン骨格を有するカチオンと、下式一般式(B)で表される繰り返し単位を含む。色素多量体(B)は、下記一般式(B)で表される繰り返し単位の割合が、色素多量体を構成する全繰り返し単位の10~100質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、20質量%以上がより好ましく、30質量%以上が更に好ましく、50質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、95質量%以下がより好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022

 一般式(B)中、X2は重合によって形成される連結基を表し、L2は単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Zはアニオンを表す。
<<< Dye Multimer (B) >>>
The dye multimer (B) includes a cation having a triarylmethane skeleton or a xanthene skeleton and a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (B). In the dye multimer (B), the ratio of the repeating unit represented by the following general formula (B) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass of the total repeating units constituting the dye multimer. The lower limit is more preferably 20% by mass or more, further preferably 30% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 50% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 95% by mass or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022

In the general formula (B), X 2 represents a linking group formed by polymerization, L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Z represents an anion.
 X2は、一般式(A)のX1と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 L2は単結合または2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、炭化水素基、-NH-、-CO-、-COO-、色素骨格を含む2価の基等が例示され、炭素数1~20のアルキレン基、炭素数6~20のアリーレン基、炭素数4~20のヘテロ環基、炭素数1~20のアルキルスルホニル基、炭素数6~20のアリールスルホニル基、炭素数1~20のアルキルカルボニル基、炭素数6~20のアリールカルボニル基、炭素数1~20のアルキルアミノ基、炭素数6~20のアリールアミノ基、炭素数1~2のアルキルカルボニルオキシ基、炭素数6~20のアリールカルボニルオキシ基などが挙げられる。これら2価の連結基は、電子吸引性基で置換されていることが好ましく、電子吸引性基としては、ハロゲン原子(フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子)、ニトロ基、シアノ基、ハロゲン化アルキル基(例えばトリフルオロメチル基)、ハロゲン化アリール基が挙げられる。
 Zはアニオンを表す。アニオンとしては、特に限定はないが、-SO3 -、-COO-、-PO4 -、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン、トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンおよびテトラアリールボレートアニオンなどが挙げられる。また、一般式(Z-1)で表されるアニオン、一般式(Z-2)で表されるアニオン、下記一般式(Z-3)で表されるアニオンも好ましい。
 Zとしては、一般式(Z-1)~(Z-3)で表されるアニオンが好ましく、一般式(2-1)で表される基、フッ素化アルキルスルホンイミド基(一般式(2-2)中、Y2が窒素原子、A2がフッ素化アルキルスルホニル基を表す)、またはフッ素化アルキルスルホンメチド基(一般式(2-2)中、Y2が炭素原子、A2がフッ素化アルキルスルホニル基をそれぞれ表す)が特に好ましい。
X 2 has the same meaning as X 1 in formula (A), and the preferred range is also the same.
L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include a hydrocarbon group, —NH—, —CO—, —COO—, a divalent group containing a dye skeleton, etc., and an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, An arylene group having 20 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkylcarbonyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Arylcarbonyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, arylamino groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, alkylcarbonyloxy groups having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, arylcarbonyloxy groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and the like. . These divalent linking groups are preferably substituted with an electron-withdrawing group. Examples of the electron-withdrawing group include a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom), nitro group, cyano group, Examples thereof include a halogenated alkyl group (for example, a trifluoromethyl group) and a halogenated aryl group.
Z represents an anion. The anion is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include —SO 3 , —COO , —PO 4 , bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, and tetraarylborate anion. An anion represented by the general formula (Z-1), an anion represented by the general formula (Z-2), and an anion represented by the following general formula (Z-3) are also preferable.
Z is preferably an anion represented by general formulas (Z-1) to (Z-3), a group represented by general formula (2-1), a fluorinated alkylsulfonimide group (general formula (2- 2), Y 2 represents a nitrogen atom, A 2 represents a fluorinated alkylsulfonyl group), or a fluorinated alkyl sulfonemethide group (in general formula (2-2), Y 2 represents a carbon atom, and A 2 represents a fluorine atom. Each of which represents an alkylsulfonyl group).
一般式(Z-1)
*-Y1-A1
(一般式(Z-1)中、*は、一般式(B)中のL2との結合部位を表し、Y1はフッ素化アルキレン基を表し、A1はSO3 -を表す。)
General formula (Z-1)
* -Y 1 -A 1
(In the general formula (Z-1), * represents a binding site with L 2 in the general formula (B), Y 1 represents a fluorinated alkylene group, A 1 is SO 3 - represents a.)
 一般式(Z-1)中、Y1はフッ素化アルキレン基を表す。フッ素化アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~6がさらに好ましい。また、ペルフルオロアルキレン基であることがより好ましい。 In general formula (Z-1), Y 1 represents a fluorinated alkylene group. The fluorinated alkylene group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Moreover, it is more preferably a perfluoroalkylene group.
一般式(Z-2)
*-Y2-(A2n
 一般式(Z-2)中、*は、一般式(B)中のL2との結合部位を表す。
 Y2は、ホウ素原子、炭素原子、窒素原子、又はリン原子からなるアニオンを表す。
 Y2がホウ素原子の場合、nは3であり、A2は、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、フッ素原子およびシアノ基の少なくとも1つを含むアルキル基、または、フッ素原子およびシアノ基の少なくとも1つを含むアリール基が好ましい。
 Y2が炭素原子の場合、nは2であり、A2は、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、フッ素原子およびシアノ基の少なくとも1つを含むアルキル基、フッ素原子およびシアノ基の少なくとも1つを含むアリール基、フッ素原子およびシアノ基の少なくとも1つを含んでいてもよいアルキルスルホニル基、または、フッ素原子およびシアノ基の少なくとも1つを含んでいてもよいアリールスルホニル基が好ましい。2つのA2は互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。
 Y2が窒素原子の場合、nは1であり、A2は、フッ素原子およびシアノ基の少なくとも1つを含むアルキル基、フッ素原子およびシアノ基の少なくとも1つを含むアリール基、フッ素原子およびシアノ基の少なくとも1つを含んでいてもよいアルキルスルホニル基、または、フッ素原子およびシアノ基の少なくとも1つを含んでいてもよいアリールスルホニル基が好ましい。
 Y2がリン原子の場合、nは1または3であり、A2は、フッ素原子およびシアノ基の少なくとも1つを含むアルキル基、フッ素原子およびシアノ基の少なくとも1つを含むアリール基、フッ素原子およびシアノ基の少なくとも1つを含んでいてもよいアルキルスルホニル基、または、フッ素原子およびシアノ基の少なくとも1つを含んでいてもよいアリールスルホニル基が好ましい。
 nが2以上の場合、複数のA2は、同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
General formula (Z-2)
* -Y 2- (A 2 ) n
In the general formula (Z-2), * represents a binding site with L 2 in the general formula (B).
Y 2 represents an anion composed of a boron atom, a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, or a phosphorus atom.
When Y 2 is a boron atom, n is 3, and A 2 represents a halogen atom, a cyano group, an alkyl group containing at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group, or at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group. An aryl group is preferred.
When Y 2 is a carbon atom, n is 2 and A 2 is a halogen atom, a cyano group, an alkyl group containing at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group, an aryl containing at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group An alkylsulfonyl group which may contain at least one of a group, a fluorine atom and a cyano group, or an arylsulfonyl group which may contain at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group is preferred. Two A 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
When Y 2 is a nitrogen atom, n is 1, and A 2 is an alkyl group containing at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group, an aryl group containing at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group, a fluorine atom and a cyano group An alkylsulfonyl group which may contain at least one group or an arylsulfonyl group which may contain at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group is preferable.
When Y 2 is a phosphorus atom, n is 1 or 3, and A 2 is an alkyl group containing at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group, an aryl group containing at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group, a fluorine atom And an alkylsulfonyl group which may contain at least one of cyano groups, or an arylsulfonyl group which may contain at least one of a fluorine atom and a cyano group is preferable.
When n is 2 or more, the plurality of A 2 may be the same or different.
 一般式(Z-1)および一般式(Z-2)がフッ素原子を含む場合、Zを構成する全原子数に対してZに含まれるフッ素原子の割合が5~80%が好ましく、10~70%がより好ましい。 When the general formula (Z-1) and the general formula (Z-2) contain a fluorine atom, the ratio of the fluorine atom contained in Z to the total number of atoms constituting Z is preferably 5 to 80%, preferably 10 to 70% is more preferable.
 一般式(Z-3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023

 一般式(Z-3)中、*は、一般式(B)中のL2との結合部位を表す。
 R1~R4は、それぞれ独立してシアノ基またはフッ素化アルキル基が好ましい。
General formula (Z-3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023

In the general formula (Z-3), * represents a binding site with L 2 in the general formula (B).
R 1 to R 4 are preferably each independently a cyano group or a fluorinated alkyl group.
 一般式(B)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、特開2014-199436号公報の段落番号0162~0166に記載された構造が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (B) include the structures described in paragraph numbers 0162 to 0166 in JP-A-2014-199436.
 色素多量体(B)は、一般式(B)で表される繰り返し単位の他に、色素多量体(A)で説明した他の繰り返し単位などを含んでいてもよい。また、上述した一般式(A)で表される繰り返し単位、および、後述する一般式(C)で表される繰り返し単位を更に含んでいてもよい。 The dye multimer (B) may contain other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) in addition to the repeating unit represented by the general formula (B). Moreover, the repeating unit represented by general formula (A) mentioned above and the repeating unit represented by general formula (C) mentioned later may further be included.
<<<色素多量体(C)>>>
 色素多量体(C)は、下式一般式(C)で表される繰り返し単位を含む。色素多量体(C)は、下記一般式(C)で表される繰り返し単位の割合が、色素多量体を構成する全繰り返し単位の10~100質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、20質量%以上がより好ましく、30質量%以上が更に好ましく、50質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、95質量%以下がより好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024

 一般式(C)中、L3は単結合または2価の連結基を表す。DyeIIIは、トリアリールメタン骨格またはキサンテン骨格を有する基を表す。mは0または1を表す。
<<< Dye Multimer (C) >>>
The dye multimer (C) includes a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (C). In the dye multimer (C), the ratio of the repeating unit represented by the following general formula (C) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass of the total repeating units constituting the dye multimer. The lower limit is more preferably 20% by mass or more, further preferably 30% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 50% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 95% by mass or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024

In general formula (C), L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. DyeIII represents a group having a triarylmethane skeleton or a xanthene skeleton. m represents 0 or 1;
 一般式(C)中、L3は単結合または2価の連結基を表す。L3で表される2価の連結基としては、炭素数1~30のアルキレン基、炭素数6~30のアリーレン基、ヘテロ環連結基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-CO2-、-NR-、-CONR-、-O2C-、-SO-、-SO2-およびこれらを2個以上連結して形成される連結基が好適に挙げられる。
 mは0または1を表すが、1であることが好ましい。
In general formula (C), L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L 3 include an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH═CH—, —O—, and —S—. , —C (═O) —, —CO 2 —, —NR—, —CONR—, —O 2 C—, —SO—, —SO 2 — and a linking group formed by linking two or more thereof. Are preferable.
m represents 0 or 1, but is preferably 1.
 一般式(C)の詳細については、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0165~0167、特開2015-57487号公報の段落0080~0088の記載を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 Details of the general formula (C) can be referred to the descriptions in paragraphs 0165 to 0167 of JP2013-29760A and paragraphs 0080 to 0088 of JP2015-57487A, the contents of which are described in this specification. Incorporated into.
 一般式(C)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、以下が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (C) include the following.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 色素多量体(C)は、一般式(C)で表される繰り返し単位の他に、色素多量体(A)で説明した他の繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。 The dye multimer (C) may contain other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) in addition to the repeating unit represented by the general formula (C).
 色素多量体(C)は、逐次重合により合成できる。逐次重合とは、重付加(例えば、ジイソシアナート化合物とジオールとの反応、ジエポキシ化合物とジカルボン酸との反応、テトラカルボン酸二無水物とジオールとの反応等)および重縮合(例えば、ジカルボン酸とジオールとの反応、ジカルボン酸とジアミンとの反応等)が挙げられる。このうち、特に重付加反応により合成することが反応条件を穏和化でき、色素骨格を分解させないため好ましい。逐次重合には、公知の反応条件を適用することができる。 The dye multimer (C) can be synthesized by sequential polymerization. Sequential polymerization means polyaddition (for example, reaction of diisocyanate compound and diol, reaction of diepoxy compound and dicarboxylic acid, reaction of tetracarboxylic dianhydride and diol, etc.) and polycondensation (for example, dicarboxylic acid). And a diol, a reaction of a dicarboxylic acid and a diamine, and the like. Among these, synthesis by polyaddition reaction is particularly preferable because the reaction conditions can be moderated and the dye skeleton is not decomposed. Known reaction conditions can be applied to the sequential polymerization.
<<<色素多量体(D)>>>
 色素多量体(D)は、一般式(D)で表される。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027

 一般式(D)中、L4はn価の連結基を表す。nは2~20の整数を表す。DyeIVは、トリアリールメタン骨格もしくはキサンテン骨格を有する基、または、トリアリールメタン骨格もしくはキサンテン骨格を有する繰り返し単位を含むポリマー鎖を表す。
<<< Dye Multimer (D) >>>
The dye multimer (D) is represented by the general formula (D).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027

In general formula (D), L 4 represents an n-valent linking group. n represents an integer of 2 to 20. DyeIV represents a polymer chain including a group having a triarylmethane skeleton or a xanthene skeleton, or a repeating unit having a triarylmethane skeleton or a xanthene skeleton.
 一般式(D)中、nは2~15が好ましく、2~14がより好ましく、2~8がさらにより好ましく、2~7が特に好ましく、2~6が最も好ましい。
 なお、1つの色素における、nは、整数であるが、本発明の着色組成物は、色素多量体(D)として、nが異なるものを複数含んでいてもよい。従って、本発明の着色組成物中の、nの平均値は整数にならない場合がある。
 本発明において、1つの色素における、nは、2~20の整数を表すことが好ましい。
 また、色素多量体(D)が、一般式(D)におけるnが2である色素a1を50質量%と、nが1の色素a2を50質量%含有する混合物である場合、nの平均値は1.5となるが、この混合物に含まれる上記色素a1は、nが2~20の整数を満たすので、色素多量体(D)に該当する。
 また、色素多量体(D)が、複数の色素多量体(D)の混合物である場合は、nの平均値が2~20の数であることが好ましい。
In the general formula (D), n is preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 14, still more preferably 2 to 8, particularly preferably 2 to 7, and most preferably 2 to 6.
In addition, although n in one pigment | dye is an integer, the coloring composition of this invention may contain multiple things from which n differs as a pigment | dye multimer (D). Therefore, the average value of n in the colored composition of the present invention may not be an integer.
In the present invention, n in one dye preferably represents an integer of 2 to 20.
Further, when the dye multimer (D) is a mixture containing 50% by mass of the dye a1 in which n is 2 in the general formula (D) and 50% by mass of the dye a2 in which n is 1, the average value of n The dye a1 contained in this mixture corresponds to the dye multimer (D) because n satisfies an integer of 2 to 20.
Further, when the dye multimer (D) is a mixture of a plurality of dye multimers (D), the average value of n is preferably a number of 2 to 20.
 L4はn価の連結基を表す。n価の連結基としては、1から100個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から50個までの酸素原子、1個から200個までの水素原子、および0個から20個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基が含まれ、無置換でも置換基を更に有していてもよい。
 n価の連結基は、具体的な例として、下記の構造単位または以下の構造単位が2以上組み合わさって構成される基(環構造を形成していてもよい)を挙げることができる。
L 4 represents an n-valent linking group. n-valent linking groups include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and 0 To 20 sulfur atoms are included, which may be unsubstituted or further substituted.
Specific examples of the n-valent linking group include the following structural unit or a group composed of a combination of two or more of the following structural units (which may form a ring structure).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 n価の連結基の具体的な例を以下に示す。但し、本発明においては、これらに制限されるものではない。また、特開2008-222950号公報の段落番号0071~0072に記載された連結基、特開2013-029760号公報の段落番号0176に記載された連結基も挙げられる。 Specific examples of n-valent linking groups are shown below. However, the present invention is not limited to these. In addition, a linking group described in paragraph Nos. 0071 to 0072 of JP-A-2008-222950 and a linking group described in paragraph No. 0176 of JP-A-2013-029760 are also included.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 色素多量体(D)は、一般式(D1)で表されることも好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033

 一般式(D)中、L4はn価の連結基を表す。nは2~20の整数を表す。DyeIVaは、トリアリールメタン骨格もしくはキサンテン骨格を有する基、または、トリアリールメタン骨格もしくはキサンテン骨格を有する繰り返し単位を含むポリマー鎖を表す。Sは硫黄原子を表す。
The dye multimer (D) is also preferably represented by the general formula (D1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033

In general formula (D), L 4 represents an n-valent linking group. n represents an integer of 2 to 20. DyeIVa represents a polymer chain including a group having a triarylmethane skeleton or a xanthene skeleton, or a repeating unit having a triarylmethane skeleton or a xanthene skeleton. S represents a sulfur atom.
(色素多量体(D)の好ましい態様1)
 色素多量体(D)の好ましい態様の一つは、下記一般式(D-1)で表される構造が挙げられる。
(D-R2n-R1-(L1-P)m   ・・・(D-1)
 一般式(D-1)中、R1は、(m+n)価の連結基を表し、
 Pは、繰り返し単位を有する1価の置換基を表し、
 Dは、色素骨格を表し、
 R2およびL1は、それぞれ独立に、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
 mは、1~13の整数を表し、
 mが1の場合、Pは繰り返し単位を2個以上有する1価の置換基を表し、
 mが2以上の場合、複数のPは互いに異なっていても良く、複数のPを構成する繰り返し単位の個数の平均値が2個以上であり、
 nは、2~14の整数を表し、
 nが2以上の場合、複数のDは互いに異なっていても良く、
 m+nは、2~15の整数を表す。
(Preferred embodiment 1 of the dye multimer (D))
One preferred embodiment of the dye multimer (D) is a structure represented by the following general formula (D-1).
(D-R 2 ) n -R 1- (L 1 -P) m (D-1)
In general formula (D-1), R 1 represents a (m + n) -valent linking group,
P represents a monovalent substituent having a repeating unit;
D represents a dye skeleton,
R 2 and L 1 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
m represents an integer of 1 to 13,
when m is 1, P represents a monovalent substituent having two or more repeating units;
When m is 2 or more, the plurality of Ps may be different from each other, the average value of the number of repeating units constituting the plurality of Ps is 2 or more,
n represents an integer of 2 to 14,
when n is 2 or more, the plurality of D may be different from each other;
m + n represents an integer of 2 to 15.
 一般式(D-1)中、mは1~13の整数を表す。mは、1~5が好ましく、1~4がより好ましく、1~3が特に好ましい。
 一般式(D-1)中、nは2~14の整数を表す。nは、2~8が好ましく、2~7がより好ましく、2~6が特に好ましく、2~5が一層好ましい。
 一般式(D-1)中、m+nは、2~15が好ましい。
 1つの色素における、mおよびnは、それぞれ整数であるが、本発明においては、一般式(D-1)におけるm、nが異なる色素多量体を複数含んでいてもよい。従って、本発明の着色組成物中の、mおよびnの平均値は整数にならない場合がある。本発明において、1つの色素における、mは、1~13の整数を表すことが好ましい。また、色素多量体(D)が、複数の色素多量体(D)の混合物である場合は、mの平均値は、1~13の表し、nの平均値は、2~14を表すことが好ましい。
In general formula (D-1), m represents an integer of 1 to 13. m is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 4, and particularly preferably 1 to 3.
In general formula (D-1), n represents an integer of 2 to 14. n is preferably 2 to 8, more preferably 2 to 7, particularly preferably 2 to 6, and more preferably 2 to 5.
In general formula (D-1), m + n is preferably 2 to 15.
M and n in one dye are integers, but in the present invention, a plurality of dye multimers having different m and n in the general formula (D-1) may be included. Therefore, the average value of m and n in the coloring composition of the present invention may not be an integer. In the present invention, m in one dye preferably represents an integer of 1 to 13. When the dye multimer (D) is a mixture of a plurality of dye multimers (D), the average value of m is 1 to 13, and the average value of n is 2 to 14. preferable.
 一般式(D-1)中、R1は、(m+n)価の連結基を表す。m+nは2~15を満たす。
 R1で表される(m+n)価の連結基としては、1から100個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から50個までの酸素原子、1個から200個までの水素原子、および0個から20個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基が含まれ、無置換でも置換基を更に有していてもよい。R1が表す(m+n)価の連結基は、具体的な例として、上述したL4で説明した構造が挙げられる。
In general formula (D-1), R 1 represents a (m + n) -valent linking group. m + n satisfies 2 to 15.
Examples of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, and 1 to 200. Groups consisting of up to 20 hydrogen atoms and 0 to 20 sulfur atoms, which may be unsubstituted or further substituted. Specific examples of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 include the structure described above for L 4 .
 一般式(D-1)中、R2およびL1は、それぞれ独立に、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。R2およびL1が複数存在する場合は、同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
 2価の連結基としては、1から100個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から50個までの酸素原子、1個から200個までの水素原子、および0個から20個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基が含まれ、無置換でも置換基を更に有していてもよい。
In general formula (D-1), R 2 and L 1 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. When a plurality of R 2 and L 1 are present, they may be the same or different.
Divalent linking groups include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and 0 To 20 sulfur atoms are included, which may be unsubstituted or further substituted.
 2価の連結基は、具体的な例として、下記の構造単位または以下の構造単位が2以上組み合わさって構成される基を挙げることができる。R2およびL1は、-S-を含む基が好ましく、-S-がより好ましい。 Specific examples of the divalent linking group include a group constituted by combining two or more of the following structural units or the following structural units. R 2 and L 1 are preferably a group containing —S—, more preferably —S—.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 一般式(D-1)中、Pは、置換基を表す。置換基としては、ビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位を有する1価の置換基が好ましい。mが2以上の場合、m個のPは、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
 mが1の場合、Pはビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位を2~20個(好ましくは、2~15個、更に好ましくは2~10個)有する1価の置換基が好ましい。また、mが2以上の場合、m個のPのビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位の個数の平均値は、2~20個(好ましくは、2~15個、更に好ましくは2~10個)であることが好ましい。この態様によれば、塗布膜の平坦性が良化する。
 mが1の場合におけるPの繰り返し単位の数、mが2以上の場合、m個のPの繰り返し単位の個数の平均値は、核磁気共鳴(NMR)により求めることができる。具体的には例えば、R1で表される(m+n)価の連結基と色素骨格Dとのピーク面積比からmを求め、繰り返し単位のピーク面積比をmで割ることにより算出することができる。
In general formula (D-1), P represents a substituent. As the substituent, a monovalent substituent having a repeating unit derived from a vinyl compound is preferable. When m is 2 or more, m Ps may be the same or different.
When m is 1, P is preferably a monovalent substituent having 2 to 20 (preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10) repeating units derived from a vinyl compound. When m is 2 or more, the average number of repeating units derived from m P vinyl compounds is 2 to 20 (preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10). It is preferable. According to this aspect, the flatness of the coating film is improved.
When m is 1, the number of repeating units of P, and when m is 2 or more, the average value of the number of repeating units of m P can be obtained by nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR). Specifically, for example, m can be calculated from the peak area ratio of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 and the dye skeleton D, and the peak area ratio of the repeating unit can be calculated by dividing by m. .
 Pを構成する繰り返し単位としては、上述した色素多量体(A)で説明した他の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。他の繰り返し単位は、上述した酸基を有する繰り返し単位および重合性基を有する繰り返し単位から選ばれる1種以上を有することが好ましく、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことがさらに好ましい。
 Pが、酸基を含む繰り返し単位を含む場合、酸基を含む繰り返し単位の割合は、Pの全繰り返し単位に対して、10~80モル%が好ましく、10~65モル%がより好ましい。
 Pが、重合性基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、重合性基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、Pの全繰り返し単位に対して、10~80モル%が好ましく、10~65モル%がより好ましい。Pが、重合性基を有する繰り返し単位を含有することにより、色移り性をより良化することができる。
Examples of the repeating unit constituting P include the other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) described above. The other repeating unit preferably has at least one selected from the above-described repeating unit having an acid group and the repeating unit having a polymerizable group, and more preferably includes a repeating unit having an acid group.
When P contains a repeating unit containing an acid group, the proportion of the repeating unit containing an acid group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 10 to 65 mol%, based on all the repeating units of P.
When P includes a repeating unit having a polymerizable group, the ratio of the repeating unit having a polymerizable group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 10 to 65 mol%, based on all the repeating units of P. . When P contains a repeating unit having a polymerizable group, the color transfer property can be further improved.
 上記一般式(D-1)で表される色素骨格を有する色素多量体は、下記方法などにより合成することができる。
 (1)カルボキシル基、ヒドロキシル基、アミノ基等から選択される官能基を末端に導入したポリマーと、色素骨格を有する酸ハライド、色素骨格を有するアルキルハライド、あるいは色素骨格を有するイソシアネート等と、を高分子反応させる方法。
 (2)末端に炭素-炭素二重結合を導入したポリマーと、色素骨格を有するメルカプタンと、をマイケル付加反応させる方法。
 (3)末端に炭素-炭素二重結合を導入したポリマーと、色素骨格を有するメルカプタンと、をラジカル発生剤存在下で反応させる方法。
 (4)末端に複数のメルカプタンを導入したポリマーと、炭素-炭素二重結合および色素骨格とを有する化合物と、をラジカル発生剤存在下で反応させる方法。
 (5)色素骨格を有するチオール化合物の存在下で、ビニル化合物をラジカル重合する方法。
 上記のうち、合成上の容易さから、(2)~(5)の合成方法が好ましく、(3)~(5)の合成方法がより好ましい。
The dye multimer having the dye skeleton represented by the general formula (D-1) can be synthesized by the following method or the like.
(1) A polymer in which a functional group selected from a carboxyl group, a hydroxyl group, an amino group and the like is introduced at the end, an acid halide having a dye skeleton, an alkyl halide having a dye skeleton, or an isocyanate having a dye skeleton, and the like. Polymer reaction method.
(2) A method in which a polymer having a carbon-carbon double bond introduced at the terminal and a mercaptan having a dye skeleton are subjected to a Michael addition reaction.
(3) A method of reacting a polymer having a carbon-carbon double bond introduced at a terminal thereof with a mercaptan having a dye skeleton in the presence of a radical generator.
(4) A method in which a polymer having a plurality of mercaptans introduced at its terminal is reacted with a compound having a carbon-carbon double bond and a dye skeleton in the presence of a radical generator.
(5) A method in which a vinyl compound is radically polymerized in the presence of a thiol compound having a dye skeleton.
Of the above methods, the synthesis methods (2) to (5) are preferable and the synthesis methods (3) to (5) are more preferable because of ease of synthesis.
(色素多量体(D)の好ましい態様2)
 色素多量体(D)の好ましい態様の一つは、下記一般式(D-2)で表される構造が挙げられる。
P-(Q)n   ・・・(D-2)
 一般式(D-2)中、Pはn価の連結基を表し、
 Qは色素骨格を有する繰り返し単位を含むポリマー鎖を表し、
 n個のQの、色素骨格を有する繰り返し単位の個数の平均値が2個以上であり、
 nは3~10の整数を表す。
(Preferred embodiment 2 of dye multimer (D))
One preferred embodiment of the dye multimer (D) is a structure represented by the following general formula (D-2).
P- (Q) n (D-2)
In general formula (D-2), P represents an n-valent linking group,
Q represents a polymer chain containing a repeating unit having a dye skeleton,
The average value of the number of repeating units of n Q having a dye skeleton is 2 or more,
n represents an integer of 3 to 10.
 <<<連結基P>>>
 一般式(D-2)中、Pは、n価の連結基を表す。
 n価の連結基としては、1から100個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から50個までの酸素原子、1個から200個までの水素原子、および0個から20個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基が含まれ、無置換でも置換基を更に有していてもよい。
 Pが表すn価の連結基は、1から60個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から40個までの酸素原子、1個から120個までの水素原子、および0個から10個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基が好ましい。より好ましくは、1から50個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から30個までの酸素原子、1個から100個までの水素原子、および0個から7個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基である。更に好ましくは、1から40個までの炭素原子、0個から8個までの窒素原子、0個から20個までの酸素原子、1個から80個までの水素原子、および0個から5個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基である。
 Pが表すn価の連結基は、多価アルコールから誘導される連結基であることが好ましい。
<<< Linking group P >>>
In general formula (D-2), P represents an n-valent linking group.
n-valent linking groups include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and 0 To 20 sulfur atoms are included, which may be unsubstituted or further substituted.
The n-valent linking group represented by P includes 1 to 60 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 40 oxygen atoms, 1 to 120 hydrogen atoms, and Groups consisting of 0 to 10 sulfur atoms are preferred. More preferably, 1 to 50 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 30 oxygen atoms, 1 to 100 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 7 atoms. It is a group consisting of the sulfur atom. More preferably, 1 to 40 carbon atoms, 0 to 8 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 20 oxygen atoms, 1 to 80 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 5 atoms. It is a group consisting of the sulfur atom.
The n-valent linking group represented by P is preferably a linking group derived from a polyhydric alcohol.
 一般式(D-2)で表わされる色素多量体は、一般式(D-2a)で表されることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035

 一般式(D-2a)中、A1はn価の連結基を表し、
 B1は単結合、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NR-、-O2C-、-CO2-、-NROC-、または、-CONR-を表し、
 Rは、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 C1は、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、
 Sは、硫黄原子を表し、
 Qは色素骨格を有する繰り返し単位を含むポリマー鎖を表し、
 n個のQの、色素骨格を有する繰り返し単位の個数の平均値が2個以上であり、
 nは3~10の整数を表す。
The dye multimer represented by the general formula (D-2) is preferably represented by the general formula (D-2a).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035

In general formula (D-2a), A 1 represents an n-valent linking group,
B 1 represents a single bond, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —NR—, —O 2 C—, —CO 2 —, —NROC—, or —CONR—,
R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group,
C 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group,
S represents a sulfur atom,
Q represents a polymer chain containing a repeating unit having a dye skeleton,
The average value of the number of repeating units of n Q having a dye skeleton is 2 or more,
n represents an integer of 3 to 10.
 一般式(D-2a)において、A1はn価の連結基を表す。
 n価の連結基としては、主鎖に酸素原子を有しても良い脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族環基および複素環基から選ばれる1種または2種以上の組み合わせからなる基が好ましい。
 脂肪族炭化水素基としては、アルキレン基、アルケニレン基が挙げられる。アルキレン基の炭素数は、例えば、1~60が好ましく、1~30がより好ましい。アルケニレン基の炭素数は、例えば、1~60が好ましく、1~30がより好ましい。
 主鎖に酸素原子を有する脂肪族炭化水素基としては、-(ORx1m-、-(Rx1O)m-で表される基が挙げられる。主鎖に酸素原子を有する脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれであってもよい。なお、主鎖とは、連結基の骨格部分を指し、置換基は含まない。
 Rx1は、アルキレン基またはアルケニレン基を表す。mは1以上の整数を表し、mが2以上の場合は、m個のRx1は、同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
 Rx1が表すアルキレン基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~5が更に好ましい。アルキレン基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。
 Rx1が表すアルケニレン基の炭素数は、2~20が好ましく、2~10がより好ましく、2~5が更に好ましい。アルケニレン基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。
 芳香族環基は、単環であってもよく、多環であってもよい。
 複素環基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。複素環基は、単環であってもよく、多環であってもよい。複素環基に含まれるヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子が例示される。窒素原子が好ましい。ヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。
In the general formula (D-2a), A 1 represents an n-valent linking group.
The n-valent linking group is preferably a group consisting of one or a combination of two or more selected from an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic ring group and a heterocyclic group which may have an oxygen atom in the main chain.
Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group and an alkenylene group. The number of carbon atoms of the alkylene group is, for example, preferably 1-60, and more preferably 1-30. The number of carbon atoms of the alkenylene group is, for example, preferably 1-60, and more preferably 1-30.
Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group having an oxygen atom in the main chain include groups represented by — (OR x1 ) m — and — (R x1 O) m —. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group having an oxygen atom in the main chain may be linear, branched or cyclic. The main chain refers to a skeleton portion of a linking group and does not include a substituent.
R x1 represents an alkylene group or an alkenylene group. m represents an integer of 1 or more. When m is 2 or more, m R x1 s may be the same or different.
The alkylene group represented by R x1 preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The carbon number of the alkenylene group represented by R x1 is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 10, and still more preferably 2 to 5. The alkenylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The aromatic ring group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The heterocyclic group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Examples of the hetero atom contained in the heterocyclic group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom. A nitrogen atom is preferred. The number of heteroatoms is preferably 1 to 3.
 A1が表すn価の連結基は、主鎖に酸素原子を有しても良い炭化水素基、芳香族環基、複素環基、主鎖に酸素原子を有しても良い炭化水素基と芳香族環基との組み合わせ、主鎖に酸素原子を有しても良い炭化水素基と複素環基との組み合わせなどが好ましく挙げられる。 The n-valent linking group represented by A 1 includes a hydrocarbon group that may have an oxygen atom in the main chain, an aromatic ring group, a heterocyclic group, and a hydrocarbon group that may have an oxygen atom in the main chain; Preferred examples include a combination with an aromatic ring group and a combination of a hydrocarbon group that may have an oxygen atom in the main chain and a heterocyclic group.
 一般式(D-2a)において、B1は単結合、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NR-、
-O2C-、-CO2-、-NROC-、または、-CONR-を表し、単結合、-O-、
-CO-、-O2C-、-CO2-、-NROC-、または、-CONR-が好ましい。
 Rは、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。
 Rが表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれであってもよい。
 Rが表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。
 Rは水素原子またはアルキル基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。
In the general formula (D-2a), B 1 is a single bond, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —NR—,
Represents —O 2 C—, —CO 2 —, —NROC—, or —CONR—, and represents a single bond, —O—,
—CO—, —O 2 C—, —CO 2 —, —NROC—, or —CONR— is preferable.
R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
The alkyl group represented by R preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The number of carbon atoms of the aryl group represented by R is preferably 6-30, and more preferably 6-12.
R is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 一般式(D-2a)において、C1は、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。
 2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、オキシアルキレン基が好ましく、アルキレン基またはオキシアルキレン基がより好ましい。
 アルキレン基、オキシアルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。アルキル基、オキシアルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれであってもよい。
 アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。
In the general formula (D-2a), C 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
The divalent linking group is preferably an alkylene group, an arylene group or an oxyalkylene group, more preferably an alkylene group or an oxyalkylene group.
The alkylene group and oxyalkylene group preferably have 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group and oxyalkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The number of carbon atoms in the arylene group is preferably 6 to 30, and more preferably 6 to 12.
 Pが表すn価の連結基の具体的な例を以下に示す。但し、本発明においては、これらに制限されるものではない。 Specific examples of the n-valent linking group represented by P are shown below. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 Qが表すポリマー鎖は、色素骨格を有する繰り返し単位を含むポリマー鎖を表し、n個のQの、色素骨格を有する繰り返し単位の個数の平均値が2個以上である。n個のQは、同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
 Qが表すポリマー鎖は、色素骨格を有する繰り返し単位の平均値が2~20個であることが好ましく、2~15個がより好ましく、2~10個が更に好ましい。
 色素骨格を有する繰り返し単位の個数の平均値は、NMR(核磁気共鳴)により求めることができる。具体的には例えば、Pで表されるn価の連結基とポリマー鎖Qの繰り返し単位とのピーク面積比から、一般式(D-2)における繰り返し単位の個数を求める。次に、その値をnで割ることによりポリマー鎖Qにおける繰り返し単位の個数を算出することができる。
 ポリマー鎖Qの重量平均分子量は、2000~40000が好ましい。
The polymer chain represented by Q represents a polymer chain containing a repeating unit having a dye skeleton, and the average value of the number of repeating units of n Q having a dye skeleton is 2 or more. The n Qs may be the same or different.
The polymer chain represented by Q preferably has an average value of 2 to 20 repeating units having a dye skeleton, more preferably 2 to 15 and even more preferably 2 to 10.
The average value of the number of repeating units having a dye skeleton can be determined by NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance). Specifically, for example, the number of repeating units in the general formula (D-2) is obtained from the peak area ratio between the n-valent linking group represented by P and the repeating unit of the polymer chain Q. Next, the number of repeating units in the polymer chain Q can be calculated by dividing the value by n.
The weight average molecular weight of the polymer chain Q is preferably 2000 to 40000.
 Qが表すポリマー鎖は、色素骨格を含んでいれば特に定めるものではないが、(メタ)アクリル系樹脂、スチレン系樹脂、および、(メタ)アクリル/スチレン系樹脂から選ばれる1種であるであることが好ましい。
 色素骨格を有する繰り返し単位の骨格構造としては、特に定めるものではないが、上述した一般式(A)で表される繰り返し単位、上述した一般式(C)で表される繰り返し単位などが挙げられる。また、ポリマー鎖Qを構成する全繰り返し単位中における、色素骨格を有する繰り返し単位の合計は、5~60モル%であることが好ましく、10~50モル%がより好ましく、20~40モル%がさらに好ましい。
The polymer chain represented by Q is not particularly defined as long as it contains a dye skeleton, but is a kind selected from (meth) acrylic resins, styrene resins, and (meth) acrylic / styrene resins. Preferably there is.
The skeleton structure of the repeating unit having a dye skeleton is not particularly defined, and examples thereof include the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A) described above and the repeating unit represented by the general formula (C) described above. . The total number of repeating units having a dye skeleton in all repeating units constituting the polymer chain Q is preferably 5 to 60 mol%, more preferably 10 to 50 mol%, and 20 to 40 mol%. Further preferred.
 ポリマー鎖Qは、上述した色素骨格を有する繰り返し単位の他に、色素多量体(A)で説明した他の繰り返し単位などを含んでいてもよい。他の繰り返し単位として、酸基を有する繰り返し単位および重合性基を有する繰り返し単位から選ばれる1種以上を有することが好ましい。 The polymer chain Q may contain other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) in addition to the repeating unit having the dye skeleton described above. As another repeating unit, it is preferable to have one or more selected from a repeating unit having an acid group and a repeating unit having a polymerizable group.
 ポリマー鎖Qが重合性基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、重合性基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、ポリマー鎖Qの全繰り返し単位100モルに対し、例えば、5~50モルが好ましく、10~40モルがより好ましい。
 ポリマー鎖Qが酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、酸基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、ポリマー鎖Qの全繰り返し単位100モルに対し、例えば、5~50モルが好ましく、10~40モルがより好ましい。
When the polymer chain Q includes a repeating unit having a polymerizable group, the ratio of the repeating unit having a polymerizable group is preferably, for example, 5 to 50 mol with respect to 100 mol of all the repeating units of the polymer chain Q. Mole is more preferred.
When the polymer chain Q includes a repeating unit having an acid group, the ratio of the repeating unit having an acid group is preferably, for example, 5 to 50 moles relative to 100 moles of all the repeating units of the polymer chain Q, and 10 to 40 moles. More preferred.
 上記一般式(D-2)で表される色素多量体は、特に制限されないが、一分子中に3~10個のチオール基を有する多官能チオール化合物と、色素骨格及びラジカル重合性基を有す化合物(ラジカル重合性色素化合物)とをラジカル重合する方法により製造できる。
 多官能チオール化合物と、ラジカル重合性色素化合物とのラジカル重合は、例えば、多官能チオール化合物と、ラジカル重合性色素化合物とを適当な溶媒中に溶解し、ここにラジカル発生剤を添加して、約50℃~100℃で、付加させる方法(チオール-エン反応法)を利用して行うことができる。
The dye multimer represented by the general formula (D-2) is not particularly limited, but has a polyfunctional thiol compound having 3 to 10 thiol groups in one molecule, a dye skeleton and a radical polymerizable group. It can be produced by a method of radical polymerization of a compound (radically polymerizable dye compound).
The radical polymerization of the polyfunctional thiol compound and the radical polymerizable dye compound is performed by, for example, dissolving the polyfunctional thiol compound and the radical polymerizable dye compound in an appropriate solvent, adding a radical generator to the solution, The addition can be carried out at a temperature of about 50 ° C. to 100 ° C. (thiol-ene reaction method).
<<<色素多量体の諸性質>>>
 色素多量体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、2000~40000が好ましい。下限は、3000以上がより好ましく、4000以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、35000以下がより好ましく、30000以下がさらに好ましい。上記範囲を満たすことにより、耐溶剤性および色移り性がより良好となる。
 色素多量体がトリアリールメタン骨格を含む場合、すなわち、色素Aが色素多量体である場合は、色素Aの重量平均分子量は、2000~40000が好ましい。下限は、3000以上がより好ましく、4000以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、35000以下がより好ましく、30000以下がさらに好ましい。
 また、色素多量体がキサンテン骨格を含む場合、すなわち、色素Bが色素多量体である場合は、色素Bの重量平均分子量は、2000~40000が好ましい。下限は、3000以上がより好ましく、4000以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、35000以下がより好ましく、30000以下がさらに好ましい。
 なお、本発明において、色素多量体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフ(GPC)測定によるポリスチレン換算値であり、具体的には、後述する実施例に記載の方法で測定した値である。
<<< Properties of Dye Multimer >>>
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye multimer is preferably 2000 to 40000. The lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and further preferably 4000 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 35,000 or less and even more preferably 30000 or less. By satisfy | filling the said range, solvent resistance and color transfer property become more favorable.
When the dye multimer includes a triarylmethane skeleton, that is, when the dye A is a dye multimer, the weight average molecular weight of the dye A is preferably 2000 to 40000. The lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and further preferably 4000 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 35,000 or less and even more preferably 30000 or less.
When the dye multimer includes a xanthene skeleton, that is, when the dye B is a dye multimer, the weight average molecular weight of the dye B is preferably 2000 to 40000. The lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and further preferably 4000 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 35,000 or less and even more preferably 30000 or less.
In addition, in this invention, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of a pigment | dye multimer is a polystyrene conversion value by a gel permeation chromatograph (GPC) measurement, and specifically, it measured by the method as described in the Example mentioned later. Value.
 色素多量体の酸価は、10mgKOH/g以上が好ましく、20mgKOH/g以上がより好ましく、27mgKOH/g以上がさらに好ましく、30mgKOH/g以上が特に好ましい。また、酸価の上限は300mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、180mgKOH/g以下がさらに好ましく、130mgKOH/g以下が一層好ましく、120mgKOH/g以下がより一層好ましい。上記範囲を満たすことにより、現像性がより向上して、現像残渣をより低減できる。 The acid value of the dye multimer is preferably 10 mgKOH / g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more, further preferably 27 mgKOH / g or more, and particularly preferably 30 mgKOH / g or more. The upper limit of the acid value is preferably 300 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 180 mgKOH / g or less, still more preferably 130 mgKOH / g or less, and still more preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less. By satisfy | filling the said range, developability improves more and a development residue can be reduced more.
 色素多量体の重量平均分子量(Mw)と、数平均分子量(Mn)との比〔(Mw)/(Mn)〕は1.0~3.0であることが好ましく、1.0~2.5であることがさらに好ましく、1.0~2.0であることが特に好ましい。 The ratio [(Mw) / (Mn)] of the weight average molecular weight (Mw) to the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the dye multimer is preferably 1.0 to 3.0, preferably 1.0 to 2. 5 is more preferable, and 1.0 to 2.0 is particularly preferable.
<<他の着色剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、上記色素Aおよび色素B以外の他の着色剤を含んでいてもよい。他の着色剤は、染料および顔料のいずれのでもよい。
 また、他の着色剤は、色素多量体であってもよい。色素多量体の重量平均分子量は、2,000~50,000が好ましく、3,000~30,000がより好ましく、6,000~20,000がさらに好ましい。
 他の着色剤は、1種であってもよく、2種以上であってもよい。
<< other colorants >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a colorant other than the dye A and the dye B. The other colorant may be either a dye or a pigment.
The other colorant may be a dye multimer. The weight average molecular weight of the dye multimer is preferably 2,000 to 50,000, more preferably 3,000 to 30,000, and further preferably 6,000 to 20,000.
1 type may be sufficient as another colorant, and 2 or more types may be sufficient as it.
 顔料としては、従来公知の種々の無機顔料又は有機顔料を挙げることができる。また、無機顔料であれ有機顔料であれ、高透過率であることが好ましいことを考慮すると、平均粒子径がなるべく小さい顔料の使用が好ましく、ハンドリング性をも考慮すると、上記顔料の平均粒子径は、0.01~0.1μmが好ましく、0.01~0.05μmがより好ましい。 Examples of the pigment include conventionally known various inorganic pigments or organic pigments. Further, considering that it is preferable to have a high transmittance, whether it is an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment, it is preferable to use a pigment having an average particle size as small as possible, and considering the handling properties, the average particle size of the pigment is 0.01 to 0.1 μm is preferable, and 0.01 to 0.05 μm is more preferable.
 無機顔料としては、金属酸化物、金属錯塩等で示される金属化合物を挙げることができ、具体的には、カーボンブラック、チタンブラック等の黒色顔料、鉄、コバルト、アルミニウム、カドミウム、鉛、銅、チタン、マグネシウム、クロム、亜鉛、アンチモン等の金属酸化物、および上記金属の複合酸化物を挙げることができる。 Examples of inorganic pigments include metal compounds represented by metal oxides, metal complex salts, and the like. Specifically, black pigments such as carbon black and titanium black, iron, cobalt, aluminum, cadmium, lead, copper, Mention may be made of metal oxides such as titanium, magnesium, chromium, zinc and antimony, and composite oxides of the above metals.
 有機顔料として、以下のものを挙げることができる。但し本発明は、これらに限定されるものではない。
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214等、
 C.I.ピグメントオレンジ 2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73等、
 C.I.ピグメントレッド 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,270,272,279
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン 7,10,36,37,58,59
 C.I.ピグメントバイオレット 1,19,23,27,32,37,42
 C.I.ピグメントブルー 1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,60,64,66,79,80
 C.I.ピグメントブラック 1
 これら有機顔料は、単独若しくは色純度を上げるため種々組合せて用いることができる。
The following can be mentioned as an organic pigment. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
C. I. Pigment Yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175 176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214, etc.,
C. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, etc. ,
C. I. Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48: 4 49, 49: 1, 49: 2, 52: 1, 52: 2, 53: 1, 57: 1, 60: 1, 63: 1, 66, 67, 81: 1, 81: 2, 81: 3 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184 185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,270,272,279
C. I. Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59
C. I. Pigment Violet 1,19,23,27,32,37,42
C. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 22, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80
C. I. Pigment Black 1
These organic pigments can be used alone or in various combinations in order to increase color purity.
 染料としては、例えば特開昭64-90403号公報、特開昭64-91102号公報、特開平1-94301号公報、特開平6-11614号公報、特許第2592207号公報、米国特許4808501号明細書、米国特許5667920号明細書、米国特許505950号明細書、米国特許5667920号明細書、特開平5-333207号公報、特開平6-35183号公報、特開平6-51115号公報、特開平6-194828号公報等に開示されている色素を使用できる。化学構造として区分すると、ピラゾールアゾ化合物、ピロメテン化合物、アニリノアゾ化合物、トリフェニルメタン化合物、アントラキノン化合物、ベンジリデン化合物、オキソノール化合物、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ化合物、ピリドンアゾ化合物、シアニン化合物、フェノチアジン化合物、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン化合物等を使用できる。また、染料としては色素多量体を用いてもよい。色素多量体としては、特開2011-213925号公報、特開2013-041097号公報に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the dye include JP-A 64-90403, JP-A 64-91102, JP-A-1-94301, JP-A-6-11614, JP 2592207, and US Pat. No. 4,808,501. U.S. Pat. No. 5,667,920, U.S. Pat. No. 505950, U.S. Pat. No. 5,667,920, JP-A-5-333207, JP-A-6-35183, JP-A-6-51115, JP-A-6-51115. -The pigment | dye currently disclosed by 194828 gazette etc. can be used. When classified as chemical structure, pyrazole azo compounds, pyromethene compounds, anilinoazo compounds, triphenylmethane compounds, anthraquinone compounds, benzylidene compounds, oxonol compounds, pyrazolotriazole azo compounds, pyridone azo compounds, cyanine compounds, phenothiazine compounds, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine compounds, etc. Can be used. A dye multimer may be used as the dye. Examples of the dye multimer include compounds described in JP2011-213925A and JP2013-041097A.
 また、他の着色剤は、特開2013-41097号公報の段落0084~0134の記載、及び特開2011-162760号公報の段落0029~0136の記載のアゾ色素を用いることもできる。 As other colorants, the azo dyes described in paragraphs 0084 to 0134 of JP2013-41097A and paragraphs 0029 to 0136 of JP2011-162760A can also be used.
 本発明の着色組成物において、他の着色剤の含有量は、着色剤の全量に対し1~30質量%が好ましい。上限は、25質量%以下がより好ましく、20質量%以下が更に好ましく、15質量%以下が一層好ましい。下限は、3質量%以上がより好ましく、5質量%以上が更に好ましく、7質量%以上が一層好ましい。
 また、他の着色剤を実質的に含有しない態様とすることもできる。なお、他の着色剤を実質的に含有しないとは、例えば、着色剤の全量に対し、0.1質量%以下が好ましく、0.05質量%以下がより好ましく、含有しないことが一層好ましい。
In the coloring composition of the present invention, the content of the other coloring agent is preferably 1 to 30% by mass with respect to the total amount of the coloring agent. The upper limit is more preferably 25% by mass or less, further preferably 20% by mass or less, and further preferably 15% by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 3% by mass or more, further preferably 5% by mass or more, and further preferably 7% by mass or more.
Moreover, it can also be set as the aspect which does not contain other coloring agents substantially. In addition, 0.1 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the whole quantity of a coloring agent, for example, and 0.05 mass% or less is more preferable, and it is still more preferable not to contain that other coloring agents are not contained substantially.
 本発明の着色組成物は、着色組成物中の全固形分に対する着色剤の含有量は、10~60質量%が好ましい。下限は、20質量%以上がより好ましく、30質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、55質量%以下がより好ましい。着色剤の含有量が上述した範囲であれば、着色剤以外の成分の含有量を高めることができ、現像性をより向上できる。 In the colored composition of the present invention, the content of the colorant with respect to the total solid content in the colored composition is preferably 10 to 60% by mass. The lower limit is more preferably 20% by mass or more, and further preferably 30% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 55% by mass or less. If content of a colorant is the range mentioned above, content of components other than a colorant can be raised and developability can be improved more.
<<硬化性化合物>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、硬化性化合物を含有する。硬化性化合物としては、ラジカル、酸、熱により架橋可能な公知の化合物を用いることができる。
 本発明において、硬化性化合物は、例えば、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基、環状エーテル(エポキシ、オキセタン)基、メチロール基等を有する化合物が挙げられ、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物が好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基などが挙げられる。
 本発明において、硬化性化合物は、ラジカルにより重合可能な化合物が好ましく、ラジカル重合性化合物が好ましく、光ラジカル重合性化合物(以下、ラジカル重合性化合物を重合性化合物ともいう)がより好ましい。
<< Curable compound >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a curable compound. As the curable compound, known compounds that can be cross-linked by radicals, acids, and heat can be used.
In the present invention, examples of the curable compound include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether (epoxy, oxetane) group, a methylol group, and the like, and a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferable. Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
In the present invention, the curable compound is preferably a compound polymerizable by radicals, preferably a radical polymerizable compound, and more preferably a radical photopolymerizable compound (hereinafter, the radical polymerizable compound is also referred to as a polymerizable compound).
 重合性化合物は、例えば、モノマー、プレポリマー、すなわち2量体、3量体及びオリゴマー、又はそれらの混合物並びにそれらの多量体などの化学的形態のいずれであってもよい。重合性化合物は、モノマーが好ましい。
 重合性化合物は、3~15官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが好ましく、3~6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることがより好ましい。
 重合性化合物の分子量は、100~3000が好ましく、200~2000がより好ましい。
 モノマー、プレポリマーの例としては、不飽和カルボン酸(例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸、マレイン酸など)やそのエステル類、アミド類、並びにこれらの多量体が挙げられ、好ましくは、不飽和カルボン酸と脂肪族多価アルコール化合物とのエステル、および不飽和カルボン酸と脂肪族多価アミン化合物とのアミド類、並びにこれらの多量体である。また、ヒドロキシル基、アミノ基、メルカプト基等の求核性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能イソシアネート類或いはエポキシ類との付加反応物や、単官能若しくは多官能のカルボン酸との脱水縮合反応物等も好適に使用される。また、イソシアネート基、エポキシ基等の親電子性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との反応物、ハロゲン基やトシルオキシ基等の脱離性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との反応物も好適である。また、上記の不飽和カルボン酸の代わりに、不飽和ホスホン酸、スチレン等のビニルベンゼン誘導体、ビニルエーテル、アリルエーテル等に置き換えた化合物群を使用することも可能である。
 これらの具体的な化合物としては、特開2009-288705号公報の段落番号〔0095〕~〔0108〕に記載されている化合物を本発明においても好適に用いることができる。
The polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form such as a monomer, a prepolymer, that is, a dimer, a trimer and an oligomer, or a mixture thereof and a multimer thereof. The polymerizable compound is preferably a monomer.
The polymerizable compound is preferably a 3 to 15 functional (meth) acrylate compound, more preferably a 3 to 6 functional (meth) acrylate compound.
The molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 3000, and more preferably 200 to 2000.
Examples of monomers and prepolymers include unsaturated carboxylic acids (eg, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), esters, amides, and multimers thereof. Preferred are esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compounds, amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyvalent amine compounds, and multimers thereof. In addition, addition reaction products of monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxies with unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having a nucleophilic substituent such as hydroxyl group, amino group, mercapto group, monofunctional or polyfunctional. A dehydration condensation reaction product with a functional carboxylic acid is also preferably used. Reaction products of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having electrophilic substituents such as isocyanate groups and epoxy groups with monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines and thiols, halogen groups and tosyloxy groups A reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a leaving substituent such as monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines or thiols is also suitable. Moreover, it is also possible to use a compound group in which the unsaturated carboxylic acid is replaced with an unsaturated phosphonic acid, a vinylbenzene derivative such as styrene, vinyl ether, allyl ether or the like.
As these specific compounds, compounds described in paragraphs [0095] to [0108] of JP-A-2009-288705 can be preferably used in the present invention.
 本発明において、重合性化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基を1個以上有する、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つ化合物も好ましい。その例としては、例えば、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0227、特開2008-292970号公報の段落番号0254~0257に記載の化合物を参酌でき、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 In the present invention, the polymerizable compound is also preferably a compound having at least one group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond and having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher under normal pressure. As examples thereof, for example, compounds described in paragraph 0227 of JP 2013-29760 A and paragraphs 0254 to 0257 of JP 2008-292970 A can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 重合性化合物は、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-330;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-320;日本化薬株式会社製)ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-310;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬株式会社製、NKエステルA-DPH-12E;新中村化学社製)、およびこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール残基を介している構造(例えば、サートマー社から市販されている、SR454、SR499)が好ましい。これらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。また、KAYARAD RP-1040(日本化薬株式会社製)、NKエステルA-TMMT(新中村化学(株)製)を使用することもできる。
 以下に好ましい重合性化合物の態様を示す。
The polymerizable compounds are dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (KAYARAD D-320 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.). Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., NK Ester A-DPH-12E (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and structures in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are mediated by ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues (for example, commercially available from Sartomer, SR454, SR499) Is preferred . These oligomer types can also be used. KAYARAD RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and NK ester A-TMMT (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) can also be used.
Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable compound are shown below.
 重合性化合物は、カルボキシル基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基等の酸基を有していてもよい。酸基を有する重合性化合物としては、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステルが好ましく、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物の未反応のヒドロキシル基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を持たせた重合性化合物がより好ましく、特に好ましくは、このエステルにおいて、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物がペンタエリスリトール及び/又はジペンタエリスリトールであるものである。市販品としては、例えば、東亞合成株式会社製の多塩基酸変性アクリルオリゴマーとして、アロニックスM-510、アロニックスM-520、アロニックスTO-2349などが挙げられる。 The polymerizable compound may have an acid group such as a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, or a phosphoric acid group. As the polymerizable compound having an acid group, an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid is preferable, and a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride is reacted with an unreacted hydroxyl group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound. A polymerizable compound having a group is more preferable, and in this ester, the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and / or dipentaerythritol. Examples of commercially available products include Aronix M-510, Aronix M-520, Aronix TO-2349, and the like as polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
 酸基を有する重合性化合物の好ましい酸価としては、0.1~40mgKOH/gであり、特に好ましくは5~30mgKOH/gである。重合性化合物の酸価が0.1mgKOH/g以上であれば、現像溶解特性が良好であり、40mgKOH/g以下であれば、製造や取扱い上、有利である。さらには、光重合性能が良好で、硬化性に優れる。 The preferred acid value of the polymerizable compound having an acid group is 0.1 to 40 mgKOH / g, particularly preferably 5 to 30 mgKOH / g. If the acid value of the polymerizable compound is 0.1 mgKOH / g or more, the development and dissolution characteristics are good, and if it is 40 mgKOH / g or less, it is advantageous in production and handling. Furthermore, the photopolymerization performance is good and the curability is excellent.
 重合性化合物は、カプロラクトン構造を有する化合物も好ましい態様である。
 カプロラクトン構造を有する化合物としては、分子内にカプロラクトン構造を有する限り特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、トリメチロールエタン、ジトリメチロールエタン、トリメチロールプロパン、ジトリメチロールプロパン、ペンタエリスリトール、ジペンタエリスリトール、トリペンタエリスリトール、グリセリン、ジグリセロール、トリメチロールメラミン等の多価アルコールと、(メタ)アクリル酸及びε-カプロラクトンをエステル化することにより得られる、ε-カプロラクトン変性多官能(メタ)アクリレートを挙げることができる。なかでも下記一般式(Z-1)で表されるカプロラクトン構造を有する化合物が好ましい。
The polymerizable compound is also preferably a compound having a caprolactone structure.
The compound having a caprolactone structure is not particularly limited as long as it has a caprolactone structure in the molecule.For example, trimethylolethane, ditrimethylolethane, trimethylolpropane, ditrimethylolpropane, pentaerythritol, dipentaerythritol, Mention is made of an ε-caprolactone-modified polyfunctional (meth) acrylate obtained by esterifying (meth) acrylic acid and ε-caprolactone with a polyhydric alcohol such as tripentaerythritol, glycerin, diglycerol, trimethylolmelamine and the like. Can do. Of these, compounds having a caprolactone structure represented by the following general formula (Z-1) are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
 一般式(Z-1)中、6個のRは全てが下記一般式(Z-2)で表される基であるか、又は6個のRのうち1~5個が下記一般式(Z-2)で表される基であり、残余が下記一般式(Z-3)で表される基である。 In the general formula (Z-1), all six R are groups represented by the following general formula (Z-2), or 1 to 5 of the six R are represented by the following general formula (Z -2), and the remainder is a group represented by the following general formula (Z-3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 一般式(Z-2)中、R1は水素原子又はメチル基を示し、mは1又は2の数を示し、
「*」は結合手であることを示す。
In general formula (Z-2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, m represents a number of 1 or 2,
“*” Indicates a bond.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
 一般式(Z-3)中、R1は水素原子又はメチル基を示し、「*」は結合手であることを示す。) In general formula (Z-3), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and “*” represents a bond. )
 カプロラクトン構造を有する重合性化合物は、例えば、日本化薬(株)からKAYARAD DPCAシリーズとして市販されており、DPCA-20(上記式(Z-1)~(Z-3)においてm=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=2、R1が全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-30(同式、m=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=3、R1が全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-60(同式、m=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=6、R1が全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-120(同式においてm=2、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=6、R1が全て水素原子である化合物)等が挙げられる。 Polymerizable compounds having a caprolactone structure are commercially available, for example, from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as the KAYARAD DPCA series, and DPCA-20 (m = 1 in the above formulas (Z-1) to (Z-3), Number of groups represented by (Z-2) = 2, a compound in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms), DPCA-30 (formula, m = 1, number of groups represented by formula (Z-2)) = 3, a compound in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms), DPCA-60 (same formula, m = 1, number of groups represented by formula (Z-2) = 6, a compound in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms) ), DPCA-120 (a compound in which m = 2 in the formula, the number of groups represented by formula (Z-2) = 6, and all R 1 are hydrogen atoms).
 重合性化合物は、下記一般式(Z-4)又は(Z-5)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。 As the polymerizable compound, a compound represented by the following general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) can also be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
 一般式(Z-4)及び(Z-5)中、Eは、各々独立に、-((CH2yCH2O)-、又は-((CH2yCH(CH3)O)-を表し、yは、各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、Xは、各々独立に、(メタ)アクリロイル基、水素原子、又はカルボキシル基を表す。
 一般式(Z-4)中、(メタ)アクリロイル基の合計は3個又は4個であり、mは各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、各mの合計は0~40の整数である。
 一般式(Z-5)中、(メタ)アクリロイル基の合計は5個又は6個であり、nは各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、各nの合計は0~60の整数である。
In general formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5), each E independently represents — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O). —, Each independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and each X independently represents a (meth) acryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxyl group.
In the general formula (Z-4), the total of (meth) acryloyl groups is 3 or 4, each m independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each m is an integer of 0 to 40 .
In general formula (Z-5), the total number of (meth) acryloyl groups is 5 or 6, each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each n is an integer of 0 to 60 .
 一般式(Z-4)中、mは、0~6の整数が好ましく、0~4の整数がより好ましい。
 また、各mの合計は、2~40の整数が好ましく、2~16の整数がより好ましく、4~8の整数が特に好ましい。
 一般式(Z-5)中、nは、0~6の整数が好ましく、0~4の整数がより好ましい。
 また、各nの合計は、3~60の整数が好ましく、3~24の整数がより好ましく、6~12の整数が特に好ましい。
 また、一般式(Z-4)又は一般式(Z-5)中の-((CH2yCH2O)-又は-((CH2yCH(CH3)O)-は、酸素原子側の末端がXに結合する形態が好ましい。
In general formula (Z-4), m is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
The total of each m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and particularly preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
In general formula (Z-5), n is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
The total of each n is preferably an integer of 3 to 60, more preferably an integer of 3 to 24, and particularly preferably an integer of 6 to 12.
In the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5), — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O) — represents oxygen A form in which the end on the atom side is bonded to X is preferred.
 一般式(Z-4)又は一般式(Z-5)で表される化合物は1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上併用してもよい。特に、一般式(Z-5)において、6個のX全てがアクリロイル基である形態が好ましい。 The compounds represented by formula (Z-4) or formula (Z-5) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In particular, in the general formula (Z-5), a form in which all six Xs are acryloyl groups is preferable.
 また、一般式(Z-4)又は一般式(Z-5)で表される化合物の重合性化合物中における全含有量としては、20質量%以上が好ましく、50質量%以上がより好ましい。 The total content of the compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) in the polymerizable compound is preferably 20% by mass or more, and more preferably 50% by mass or more.
 一般式(Z-4)又は一般式(Z-5)で表される化合物は、従来公知の工程である、ペンタエリスリト-ル又はジペンタエリスリト-ルにエチレンオキシド又はプロピレンオキシドを開環付加反応により開環骨格を結合する工程と、開環骨格の末端ヒドロキシル基に、例えば(メタ)アクリロイルクロライドを反応させて(メタ)アクリロイル基を導入する工程と、から合成することができる。各工程は良く知られた工程であり、当業者は容易に一般式(Z-4)又は(Z-5)で表される化合物を合成することができる。 The compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) is a conventionally known process, which is a ring-opening addition of ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol. It can be synthesized from a step of bonding a ring-opening skeleton by reaction and a step of introducing a (meth) acryloyl group by reacting, for example, (meth) acryloyl chloride with a terminal hydroxyl group of the ring-opening skeleton. Each step is a well-known step, and a person skilled in the art can easily synthesize a compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5).
 一般式(Z-4)又は一般式(Z-5)で表される化合物の中でも、ペンタエリスリトール誘導体及び/又はジペンタエリスリトール誘導体がより好ましい。
 具体的には、下記式(a)~(f)で表される化合物(以下、「例示化合物(a)~(f)」とも称する。)が挙げられ、中でも、例示化合物(a)、(b)、(e)、(f)が好ましい。
Among the compounds represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5), a pentaerythritol derivative and / or a dipentaerythritol derivative are more preferable.
Specific examples include compounds represented by the following formulas (a) to (f) (hereinafter also referred to as “exemplary compounds (a) to (f)”). Among them, exemplary compounds (a), (f) b), (e) and (f) are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
 一般式(Z-4)、(Z-5)で表される重合性化合物の市販品としては、例えばサートマー社製のエチレンオキシ鎖を4個有する4官能アクリレートであるSR-494、日本化薬株式会社製のペンチレンオキシ鎖を6個有する6官能アクリレートであるDPCA-60、イソブチレンオキシ鎖を3個有する3官能アクリレートであるTPA-330などが挙げられる。 Examples of commercially available polymerizable compounds represented by the general formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5) include SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains manufactured by Sartomer, Nippon Kayaku Examples thereof include DPCA-60, which is a hexafunctional acrylate having six pentyleneoxy chains, and TPA-330, which is a trifunctional acrylate having three isobutyleneoxy chains.
 重合性化合物としては、特公昭48-41708号公報、特開昭51-37193号公報、特公平2-32293号公報、特公平2-16765号公報に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類や、特公昭58-49860号公報、特公昭56-17654号公報、特公昭62-39417号公報、特公昭62-39418号公報記載のエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物類も好適である。また、特開昭63-277653号公報、特開昭63-260909号公報、特開平1-105238号公報に記載される、分子内にアミノ構造やスルフィド構造を有する付加重合性化合物類を用いることによって、非常に感光スピードに優れた着色組成物を得ることができる。
 市販品としては、ウレタンオリゴマーUAS-10、UAB-140(山陽国策パルプ社製)、UA-7200(新中村化学社製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬社製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600(共栄社製)などが挙げられる。
Examples of the polymerizable compound include urethane acrylates described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, JP-B-2-16765, Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418 are also suitable. Further, addition polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are used. Thus, a colored composition having an extremely excellent photosensitive speed can be obtained.
Commercially available products include urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (manufactured by Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA- 306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha) and the like.
 本発明の着色組成物において、硬化性化合物の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分に対し、0.1~40質量%が好ましい。下限は、例えば0.5質量%以上がより好ましく、1質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、例えば、30質量%以下がより好ましく、20質量%以下が更に好ましい。
 硬化性化合物は、1種単独であってもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
In the colored composition of the present invention, the content of the curable compound is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored composition. For example, the lower limit is more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and further preferably 1% by mass or more. For example, the upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less, and still more preferably 20% by mass or less.
One curable compound may be used alone, or two or more curable compounds may be used in combination. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
<<多官能チオール化合物>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物の反応を促進させることなどを目的として、分子内に2個以上のメルカプト基を有する多官能チオール化合物を含んでいてもよい。多官能チオール化合物は、2級のアルカンチオール類であることが好ましく、特に下記一般式(T1)で表される構造を有する化合物であることが好ましい。
 一般式(T1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045

(式(T1)中、nは2~4の整数を表し、Lは2~4価の連結基を表す。)
<< Polyfunctional thiol compound >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a polyfunctional thiol compound having two or more mercapto groups in the molecule for the purpose of promoting the reaction of the polymerizable compound. The polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably a secondary alkanethiol, and particularly preferably a compound having a structure represented by the following general formula (T1).
General formula (T1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045

(In the formula (T1), n represents an integer of 2 to 4, and L represents a divalent to tetravalent linking group.)
 上記一般式(T1)において、連結基Lは炭素数2~12の脂肪族基であることが好ましく、nが2であり、Lが炭素数2~12のアルキレン基であることが特に好ましい。多官能チオール化合物の具体的としては、下記の構造式(T2)~(T4)で表される化合物が挙げられ、式(T2)で表される化合物が特に好ましい。これらの多官能チオールは1種または複数組み合わせて使用することが可能である。 In the above general formula (T1), the linking group L is preferably an aliphatic group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably n is 2 and L is an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms. Specific examples of the polyfunctional thiol compound include compounds represented by the following structural formulas (T2) to (T4), and a compound represented by the formula (T2) is particularly preferable. These polyfunctional thiols can be used alone or in combination.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
 本発明の着色組成物が多官能チオールを含有する場合、多官能チオールの含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分に対して0.3~8.9質量%が好ましく、0.8~6.4質量%がより好ましい。また、多官能チオールは安定性、臭気、解像性、現像性、密着性等の改良を目的として添加してもよい。 When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a polyfunctional thiol, the content of the polyfunctional thiol is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition, and preferably 0.8 to 6 More preferably, 4% by mass. Polyfunctional thiols may be added for the purpose of improving stability, odor, resolution, developability, adhesion and the like.
<<光重合開始剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、光重合開始剤を含有することが好ましい。
 光重合開始剤としては、重合性化合物の重合を開始する能力を有する限り、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視の光線に対して感光性を有するものが好ましい。また、光励起された増感剤と何らかの作用を生じ、活性ラジカルを生成する活性剤であってもよく、モノマーの種類に応じてカチオン重合を開始させるような開始剤であってもよい。
 また、光重合開始剤は、約300nm~800nm(330nm~500nmがより好ましい。)の範囲内に少なくとも約50のモル吸光係数を有する化合物を、少なくとも1種含有していることが好ましい。
<< photopolymerization initiator >>
The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator.
The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of a polymerizable compound, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, those having photosensitivity to visible light from the ultraviolet region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates some action with a photoexcited sensitizer and generates an active radical, or may be an initiator that initiates cationic polymerization according to the type of monomer.
The photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molar extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 800 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 500 nm).
 光重合開始剤としては、例えば、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有するもの、オキサジアゾール骨格を有するもの、など)、アシルホスフィンオキサイド等のアシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、ケトオキシムエーテル、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、ヒドロキシアセトフェノンなどが挙げられる。トリアジン骨格を有するハロゲン化炭化水素化合物としては、例えば、若林ら著、Bull.Chem.Soc.Japan,42、2924(1969)記載の化合物、英国特許1388492号明細書記載の化合物、特開昭53-133428号公報記載の化合物、独国特許3337024号明細書記載の化合物、F.C.SchaeferなどによるJ.Org.Chem.;29、1527(1964)記載の化合物、特開昭62-58241号公報記載の化合物、特開平5-281728号公報記載の化合物、特開平5-34920号公報記載化合物、米国特許第4212976号明細書に記載されている化合物、などが挙げられる。 Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, and oxime derivatives. Oxime compounds such as organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, and hydroxyacetophenones. Examples of the halogenated hydrocarbon compound having a triazine skeleton include those described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan, 42, 2924 (1969), a compound described in British Patent No. 1388492, a compound described in JP-A-53-133428, a compound described in German Patent No. 3337024, F.I. C. J. Schaefer et al. Org. Chem. 29, 1527 (1964), compound described in JP-A-62-258241, compound described in JP-A-5-281728, compound described in JP-A-5-34920, US Pat. No. 4,221,976 And the compounds described in the book.
 また、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物及びその誘導体、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体及びその塩、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物、3-アリール置換クマリン化合物からなる群より選択される化合物が好ましい。 From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, oniums Compounds selected from the group consisting of compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds are preferred.
 さらに好ましくは、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物であり、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾールダイマー、ベンゾフェノン化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも一種の化合物が特に好ましい。 More preferred are trihalomethyltriazine compound, α-aminoketone compound, acylphosphine compound, phosphine oxide compound, oxime compound, triallylimidazole dimer, onium compound, benzophenone compound, acetophenone compound, trihalomethyltriazine compound, α-aminoketone Particularly preferred is at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimer, and benzophenone compounds.
 特に、本発明の着色組成物を固体撮像素子のカラーフィルタの作製に使用する場合には、微細なパターンをシャープな形状で形成する必要があるために、硬化性とともに未露光部に残渣がなく現像されることが重要である。このような観点からは、光重合開始剤としてはオキシム化合物を使用することが特に好ましい。特に、固体撮像素子において微細なパターンを形成する場合、硬化用露光にステッパー露光を用いるが、この露光機はハロゲンにより損傷される場合があり、光重合開始剤の添加量も低く抑える必要があるため、これらの点を考慮すれば、固体撮像素子の如き微細パターンを形成するには光重合開始剤としては、オキシム化合物を用いるのが特に好ましい。また、オキシム化合物を用いることにより、色移り性をより良化できる。
 光重合開始剤の具体例としては、例えば、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0265~0268を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
In particular, when the colored composition of the present invention is used for the production of a color filter for a solid-state imaging device, it is necessary to form a fine pattern with a sharp shape. It is important that it be developed. From such a viewpoint, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as the photopolymerization initiator. In particular, when a fine pattern is formed in a solid-state imaging device, stepper exposure is used for curing exposure, but this exposure machine may be damaged by halogen, and the amount of photopolymerization initiator added must be kept low. Therefore, in view of these points, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as a photopolymerization initiator for forming a fine pattern such as a solid-state imaging device. Further, the use of an oxime compound can improve the color transfer.
As specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator, for example, paragraphs 0265 to 0268 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 光重合開始剤としては、ヒドロキシアセトフェノン化合物、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、及び、アシルホスフィン化合物も好適に用いることができる。より具体的には、例えば、特開平10-291969号公報に記載のアミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、特許第4225898号公報に記載のアシルホスフィン系開始剤も用いることができる。
 ヒドロキシアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、IRGACURE-184、DAROCUR-1173、IRGACURE-500、IRGACURE-2959,IRGACURE-127(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。
 アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、市販品であるIRGACURE-907、IRGACURE-369、及び、IRGACURE-379EG(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤は、365nm又は405nm等の長波光源に吸収波長がマッチングされた特開2009-191179公報に記載の化合物も用いることができる。
 アシルホスフィン系開始剤としては、市販品であるIRGACURE-819やDAROCUR-TPO(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。
As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can also be suitably used. More specifically, for example, an aminoacetophenone initiator described in JP-A-10-291969 and an acylphosphine initiator described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can also be used.
As the hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator, IRGACURE-184, DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, IRGACURE-127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, commercially available products IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, and IRGACURE-379EG (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used. As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, a compound described in JP-A-2009-191179 in which an absorption wavelength is matched with a long wave light source such as 365 nm or 405 nm can also be used.
As the acylphosphine initiator, commercially available products such as IRGACURE-819 and DAROCUR-TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF) can be used.
 光重合開始剤として、より好ましくはオキシム化合物が挙げられる。
 オキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2001-233842号公報記載の化合物、特開2000-80068号公報記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報記載の化合物を用いることができる。
 本発明において、好適に用いることのできるオキシム化合物としては、例えば、3-ベンゾイロキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイロキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、及び2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オンなどが挙げられる。
 また、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.1653-1660)、
J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.156-162、Journal 
of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年)pp.202-232、特開2000-66385号公報記載の化合物、特開2000-80068号公報、特表2004-534797号公報、特開2006-342166号公報の各公報に記載の化合物等も挙げられる。
 市販品ではIRGACURE-OXE01(BASF社製)、IRGACURE-OXE02(BASF社製)も好適に用いられる。また、TR-PBG-304(常州強力電子新材料有限公司社製)、アデカアークルズNCI-831およびアデカアークルズNCI-930(ADEKA社製)も用いることができる。
More preferred examples of the photopolymerization initiator include oxime compounds.
Specific examples of the oxime compound include compounds described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, and compounds described in JP-A No. 2006-342166.
Examples of the oxime compound that can be suitably used in the present invention include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3- (4-toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutane Examples include -2-one and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one.
In addition, J.H. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 1653-1660),
J. et al. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 156-162, Journal
of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995) pp. Examples thereof include compounds described in 202-232, JP-A 2000-66385, compounds described in JP-A 2000-80068, JP-T 2004-534797, JP-A 2006-342166, and the like.
As commercially available products, IRGACURE-OXE01 (manufactured by BASF) and IRGACURE-OXE02 (manufactured by BASF) are also preferably used. Further, TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Powerful Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.), Adeka Arkles NCI-831 and Adeka Arkles NCI-930 (made by ADEKA) can also be used.
 また上記記載以外のオキシム化合物として、カルバゾールN位にオキシムが連結した特表2009-519904号公報に記載の化合物、ベンゾフェノン部位にヘテロ置換基が導入された米国特許第7626957号明細書に記載の化合物、色素部位にニトロ基が導入された特開2010-15025号公報及び米国特許公開2009-292039号明細書記載の化合物、国際公開特許2009-131189号公報に記載のケトオキシム化合物、トリアジン骨格とオキシム骨格を同一分子内に含有する米国特許7556910号明細書に記載の化合物、405nmに吸収極大を有しg線光源に対して良好な感度を有する特開2009-221114号公報記載の化合物、などを用いてもよい。
 好ましくは、例えば、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0274~0275を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 具体的には、オキシム化合物としては、下記式(OX-1)で表される化合物が好ましい。なお、オキシムのN-O結合が(E)体のオキシム化合物であっても、(Z)体のオキシム化合物であっても、(E)体と(Z)体との混合物であってもよい。
Further, as oxime compounds other than those described above, compounds described in JP-T-2009-519904 in which oxime is linked to carbazole N position, and compounds described in US Pat. No. 7,626,957 in which a hetero substituent is introduced into the benzophenone moiety And compounds described in JP 2010-15025 A and U.S. Patent Publication No. 2009-292039 in which a nitro group is introduced into the dye moiety, ketoxime compounds described in International Publication No. 2009-131189, triazine skeleton and oxime skeleton In the same molecule, a compound described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-221114 having an absorption maximum at 405 nm and good sensitivity to a g-ray light source, and the like. May be.
Preferably, for example, paragraphs 0274 to 0275 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
Specifically, the oxime compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (OX-1). The oxime N—O bond may be an (E) oxime compound, a (Z) oxime compound, or a mixture of (E) and (Z) isomers. .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
 一般式(OX-1)中、RおよびBは各々独立に一価の置換基を表し、Aは二価の有機基を表し、Arはアリール基を表す。
 一般式(OX-1)中、Rで表される一価の置換基としては、一価の非金属原子団であることが好ましい。
 一価の非金属原子団としては、アルキル基、アリール基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、複素環基、アルキルチオカルボニル基、アリールチオカルボニル基等が挙げられる。また、これらの基は、1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。また、前述した置換基は、さらに他の置換基で置換されていてもよい。
 置換基としてはハロゲン原子、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基またはアリールオキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、アシル基、アルキル基、アリール基等が挙げられる。
 一般式(OX-1)中、Bで表される一価の置換基としては、アリール基、複素環基、アリールカルボニル基、又は、複素環カルボニル基が好ましい。これらの基は1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、前述した置換基が例示できる。
 一般式(OX-1)中、Aで表される二価の有機基としては、炭素数1~12のアルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルキニレン基が好ましい。これらの基は1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、前述した置換基が例示できる。
In general formula (OX-1), R and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent, A represents a divalent organic group, and Ar represents an aryl group.
In the general formula (OX-1), the monovalent substituent represented by R is preferably a monovalent nonmetallic atomic group.
Examples of the monovalent nonmetallic atomic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, and an arylthiocarbonyl group. Moreover, these groups may have one or more substituents. Moreover, the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkyl group, and an aryl group.
In General Formula (OX-1), the monovalent substituent represented by B is preferably an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an arylcarbonyl group, or a heterocyclic carbonyl group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
In the general formula (OX-1), the divalent organic group represented by A is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkylene group, or an alkynylene group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
 本発明は、光重合開始剤として、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2010-262028号公報記載の化合物、特表2014-500852号公報記載の化合物24、36~40、特開2013-164471号公報記載の化合物(C-3)などが挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれることとする。 In the present invention, an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP 2010-262028 A, compounds 24 and 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and compounds described in JP-A 2013-164471 ( C-3). This content is incorporated herein.
 本発明は、光重合開始剤として、下記一般式(1)または(2)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
In the present invention, a compound represented by the following general formula (1) or (2) can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
 式(1)において、R1及びR2は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数4~20の脂環式炭化水素基、炭素数6~30のアリール基、または、炭素数7~30のアリールアルキル基を表し、R1及びR2がフェニル基の場合、フェニル基どうしが結合してフルオレン基を形成してもよく、R3及びR4は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6~30のアリール基、炭素数7~30のアリールアルキル基または炭素数4~20の複素環基を表し、Xは、直接結合またはカルボニル基を示す。 In the formula (1), R 1 and R 2 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or When an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms is represented and R 1 and R 2 are phenyl groups, the phenyl groups may be bonded to each other to form a fluorene group, and R 3 and R 4 are each independently Represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, wherein X is a direct bond or carbonyl Indicates a group.
 式(2)において、R1、R2、R3及びR4は、式(1)におけるR1、R2、R3及びR4と同義であり、R5は、-R6、-OR6、-SR6、-COR6、-CONR66、-NR6COR6、-OCOR6、-COOR6、-SCOR6、-OCSR6、-COSR6、-CSOR6、-CN、ハロゲン原子または水酸基を表し、R6は、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6~30のアリール基、炭素数7~30のアリールアルキル基または炭素数4~20の複素環基を表し、Xは、直接結合またはカルボニル基を表し、aは0~4の整数を表す。 In the formula (2), R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 have the same meanings as R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 in Formula (1), R 5 is -R 6, -OR 6 , —SR 6 , —COR 6 , —CONR 6 R 6 , —NR 6 COR 6 , —OCOR 6 , —COOR 6 , —SCOR 6 , —OCSR 6 , —COSR 6 , —CSOR 6 , —CN, halogen R 6 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms; X represents a direct bond or a carbonyl group, and a represents an integer of 0 to 4.
 上記式(1)及び式(2)において、R1及びR2は、それぞれ独立に、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、i-プロピル、シクロヘキシル基またはフェニル基が好ましい。R3はメチル基、エチル基、フェニル基、トリル基またはキシリル基が好ましい。R4は炭素数1~6のアルキル基又はフェニル基が好ましい。R5はメチル基、エチル基、フェニル基、トリル基又はナフチル基が好ましい。Xは直接結合が好ましい。
 式(1)及び式(2)で表される化合物の具体例としては、例えば、特開2014-137466号公報の段落番号0076~0079に記載された化合物が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれることとする。
In the above formulas (1) and (2), R 1 and R 2 are preferably each independently a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an i-propyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a phenyl group. R 3 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a tolyl group or a xylyl group. R 4 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or a phenyl group. R 5 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a tolyl group or a naphthyl group. X is preferably a direct bond.
Specific examples of the compounds represented by formula (1) and formula (2) include, for example, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0076 to 0079 of JP-A No. 2014-137466. This content is incorporated herein.
 本発明において好ましく使用されるオキシム化合物の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Specific examples of the oxime compound preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
 オキシム化合物は、350nm~500nmの波長領域に極大吸収波長を有するものが好ましく、360nm~480nmの波長領域に吸収波長を有するものがより好ましく、365nm及び405nmの吸光度が高いものが特に好ましい。
 オキシム化合物は、365nm又は405nmにおけるモル吸光係数は、感度の観点から、1,000~300,000であることが好ましく、2,000~300,000であることがより好ましく、5,000~200,000であることが特に好ましい。
 化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法を用いることができるが、例えば、紫外可視分光光度計(Varian社製Cary-5 spectrophotometer)にて、酢酸エチル溶媒を用い、0.01g/Lの濃度で測定することが好ましい。
 本発明に用いられる光重合開始剤は、必要に応じて2種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。
The oxime compound preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 350 nm to 500 nm, more preferably has an absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 360 nm to 480 nm, and particularly preferably has a high absorbance at 365 nm and 405 nm.
The molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably from 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably from 2,000 to 300,000, more preferably from 5,000 to 200, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Is particularly preferred.
For the molar extinction coefficient of the compound, a known method can be used. For example, in a UV-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian), an ethyl acetate solvent is used at a concentration of 0.01 g / L. It is preferable to measure.
You may use the photoinitiator used for this invention in combination of 2 or more type as needed.
 光重合開始剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分に対し0.1~50質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは0.5~30質量%であり、さらに好ましくは1~20質量%である。この範囲で、より良好な感度とパターン形成性が得られる。本発明の着色組成物は、光重合開始剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 30% by mass, and further preferably 1 to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition. is there. Within this range, better sensitivity and pattern formability can be obtained. The colored composition of the present invention may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
 本発明において、光重合開始剤は、メタノール中での365nmの吸光係数が1.0×103mL/gcm以上である光重合開始剤(以下、光重合開始剤(a)ともいう)と、メタノール中での365nmの吸光係数が1.0×102mL/gcm以下であり、254nmの吸光係数が1.0×103mL/gcm以上である光重合開始剤(以下、光重合開始剤(b)ともいう)とを併用することも好ましい。この態様によれば、耐溶剤性に優れた硬化膜を形成しやすい。
 光重合開始剤(a)の含有量は、本発明の着色組成物の全固形分中1.5~10質量%が好ましく、3~8質量%がより好ましい。光重合開始剤(a)の含有量が10質量%以下であれば、感度が良好である。また、光重合開始剤(a)の含有量が1.5質量%以上であれば、耐溶剤性に優れた硬化膜を形成しやすい。
In the present invention, the photopolymerization initiator is a photopolymerization initiator (hereinafter also referred to as a photopolymerization initiator (a)) having an extinction coefficient of 365 nm in methanol of 1.0 × 10 3 mL / gcm or more. Photopolymerization initiator (hereinafter referred to as photopolymerization initiator) having an extinction coefficient of 365 nm in methanol of 1.0 × 10 2 mL / gcm or less and an extinction coefficient of 254 nm of 1.0 × 10 3 mL / gcm or more. (B) is also preferably used in combination. According to this aspect, it is easy to form a cured film excellent in solvent resistance.
The content of the photopolymerization initiator (a) is preferably 1.5 to 10% by mass, more preferably 3 to 8% by mass, based on the total solid content of the colored composition of the present invention. A sensitivity is favorable if content of a photoinitiator (a) is 10 mass% or less. Moreover, if content of a photoinitiator (a) is 1.5 mass% or more, it will be easy to form the cured film excellent in solvent resistance.
 光重合開始剤(a)は、メタノール中での365nmの吸光係数が1.0×103~1.0×104mL/gcmであることが好ましく、2.0×103~9.0×103mL/gcmであることがより好ましく、6.0×103~8.0×103mL/gcmであることが更に好ましい。
 光重合開始剤(a)としては、オキシム化合物、アミノアセトフェノン化合物およびアシルホスフィン化合物を好適に用いることができ、オキシム化合物が好ましい。オキシム化合物としては、上述した一般式(OX-1)で表される化合物が好ましい。
 光重合開始剤(a)の含有量は、本発明の着色組成物の全固形分中1.5~10質量%が好ましく、3~8質量%がより好ましい。光重合開始剤(a)の含有量が上記範囲であれば、耐溶剤性に優れた硬化膜を形成しやすい。光重合開始剤(a)は、1種単独で用いても2種以上を併用してもよい。
The photopolymerization initiator (a) preferably has an extinction coefficient at 365 nm in methanol of 1.0 × 10 3 to 1.0 × 10 4 mL / gcm, and 2.0 × 10 3 to 9.0. It is more preferably × 10 3 mL / gcm, and even more preferably 6.0 × 10 3 to 8.0 × 10 3 mL / gcm.
As the photopolymerization initiator (a), an oxime compound, an aminoacetophenone compound and an acylphosphine compound can be suitably used, and an oxime compound is preferable. As the oxime compound, a compound represented by the above general formula (OX-1) is preferable.
The content of the photopolymerization initiator (a) is preferably 1.5 to 10% by mass, more preferably 3 to 8% by mass, based on the total solid content of the colored composition of the present invention. If content of a photoinitiator (a) is the said range, it will be easy to form the cured film excellent in solvent resistance. A photoinitiator (a) may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
 光重合開始剤(b)は、メタノール中での365nmの吸光係数が、10~1.0×102mL/gcmであることが好ましく、20~9.0×102mL/gcmであることがより好ましい。
 光重合開始剤(a)と、光重合開始剤(b)の波長365nmの吸光係数の差は、9.0×102mL/gcm以上が好ましく、9.0×102~1.0×105mL/gcmがより好ましく、9.0×102~1.0×104mL/gcmがさらに好ましい。
 光重合開始剤(b)は、メタノール中での254nmの吸光係数が1.0×103~1.0×106mL/gcmであることが好ましく、5.0×103~1.0×105mL/gcmがより好ましい。
 光重合開始剤(b)としては、ヒドロキシアセトフェノン化合物、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、及び、アシルホスフィン化合物を好適に用いることができる。
 ヒドロキシアセトフェノン化合物は、下記式(V)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
The photopolymerization initiator (b) preferably has an extinction coefficient at 365 nm in methanol of 10 to 1.0 × 10 2 mL / gcm, and 20 to 9.0 × 10 2 mL / gcm. Is more preferable.
The difference in the extinction coefficient at a wavelength of 365 nm between the photopolymerization initiator (a) and the photopolymerization initiator (b) is preferably 9.0 × 10 2 mL / gcm or more, and 9.0 × 10 2 to 1.0 × 10 5 mL / gcm is more preferable, and 9.0 × 10 2 to 1.0 × 10 4 mL / gcm is more preferable.
The photopolymerization initiator (b) preferably has an extinction coefficient at 254 nm in methanol of 1.0 × 10 3 to 1.0 × 10 6 mL / gcm, and preferably 5.0 × 10 3 to 1.0. × 10 5 mL / gcm is more preferable.
As the photopolymerization initiator (b), hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can be suitably used.
The hydroxyacetophenone compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (V).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
 式(V)中、Rv1は水素原子、アルキル基(好ましくは、炭素数1~10のアルキル基)、アルコキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数1~10のアルコキシ基)、又は、2価の有機基を表す。Rv1が2価の有機基である場合、2個の光活性なヒドロキシアセトフェノン構造(すなわち、一般式(V)で表される化合物から置換基Rv1を除外した構造)がRv1を介して連結してなる2量体を表す。Rv2、Rv3は互いに独立して、水素原子、又は、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~10のアルキル基)を表す。また、Rv2とRv3は結合して環(好ましくは炭素数4~8の環)を形成していてもよい。上記Rv1としてのアルキル基及びアルコキシ基、Rv2及びRv3としてのアルキル基、並びに、Rv2とRv3とが結合して形成される環は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。 In the formula (V), Rv 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms), or a divalent organic compound. Represents a group. When Rv 1 is a divalent organic group, two photoactive hydroxyacetophenone structures (that is, a structure in which the substituent Rv 1 is excluded from the compound represented by the general formula (V)) are formed via Rv 1 Represents a dimer formed by linking. Rv 2 and Rv 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms). Rv 2 and Rv 3 may combine to form a ring (preferably a ring having 4 to 8 carbon atoms). Alkyl and alkoxy groups as the Rv 1, the alkyl group as Rv 2 and Rv 3, and, ring and Rv 2 and Rv 3 is formed by bonding, it may further have a substituent.
 光重合開始剤(b)の含有量は、本発明の着色組成物の全固形分中1.5~7.5質量%が好ましく、2~6質量%がより好ましい。光重合開始剤(b)の含有量が上記範囲であれば、耐溶剤性に優れた硬化膜を形成しやすい。光重合開始剤(b)は、1種単独で用いても2種以上を併用してもよい。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator (b) is preferably 1.5 to 7.5% by mass and more preferably 2 to 6% by mass in the total solid content of the colored composition of the present invention. If content of a photoinitiator (b) is the said range, it will be easy to form the cured film excellent in solvent resistance. A photoinitiator (b) may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
<<樹脂>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、樹脂を含むことが好ましい。樹脂は、例えば、顔料などの着色剤を組成物中で分散させる用途、バインダーの用途で配合される。なお、主に顔料などの着色剤を分散させるために用いられる樹脂を分散剤ともいう。ただし、樹脂のこのような用途は一例であって、このような用途以外を目的で使用することもできる。
 樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、5000~100,000が好ましい。また、数平均分子量(Mn)は、1000~20,000が好ましい。
<< Resin >>
The colored composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin. The resin is blended, for example, for the purpose of dispersing a colorant such as a pigment in the composition and the purpose of a binder. A resin used mainly for dispersing a colorant such as a pigment is also referred to as a dispersant. However, such use of the resin is merely an example, and the resin can be used for other purposes.
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 5000 to 100,000. The number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 1000 to 20,000.
 本発明の着色組成物において、樹脂の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分に対し、5~90質量%が好ましく、10~80質量%がより好ましい。 In the colored composition of the present invention, the resin content is preferably 5 to 90% by mass, more preferably 10 to 80% by mass, based on the total solid content of the colored composition.
<<<分散剤>>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、顔料を含む場合、分散剤を含有することが好ましい。
 分散剤としては、高分子分散剤〔例えば、ポリアミドアミンとその塩、ポリカルボン酸とその塩、高分子量不飽和酸エステル、変性ポリウレタン、変性ポリエステル、変性ポリ(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリル系共重合体、ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン縮合物〕、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルリン酸エステル、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルアミン、アルカノールアミン等が挙げられる。
 高分子分散剤は、その構造から更に直鎖状高分子、末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、ブロック型高分子に分類することができる。
<<< Dispersant >>>
When the coloring composition of this invention contains a pigment, it is preferable to contain a dispersing agent.
Examples of the dispersant include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamidoamine and its salt, polycarboxylic acid and its salt, high molecular weight unsaturated acid ester, modified polyurethane, modified polyester, modified poly (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic type Copolymer, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensate], polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate ester, polyoxyethylene alkylamine, alkanolamine and the like.
The polymer dispersant can be further classified into a linear polymer, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer from the structure thereof.
 末端変性型高分子としては、例えば、特開平3-112992号公報、特表2003-533455号公報等に記載の末端にリン酸基を有する高分子、特開2002-273191号公報等に記載の末端にスルホン酸基を有する高分子、特開平9-77994号公報等に記載の有機色素の部分骨格や複素環を有する高分子などが挙げられる。また、特開2007-277514号公報に記載の高分子末端に2個以上の顔料表面へのアンカー部位(酸基、塩基性基、有機色素の部分骨格やヘテロ環等)を導入した高分子も分散安定性に優れ好ましい。 Examples of the terminal-modified polymer include a polymer having a phosphate group at the terminal end described in JP-A-3-112992 and JP-T-2003-533455, and JP-A-2002-273191. Examples thereof include a polymer having a sulfonic acid group at the terminal and a polymer having a partial skeleton of organic dye or a heterocyclic ring described in JP-A-9-77994. In addition, polymers having two or more pigment surface anchor sites (acid groups, basic groups, organic dye partial skeletons, heterocycles, etc.) introduced at the polymer ends described in JP-A-2007-277514 are also available. It is preferable because of excellent dispersion stability.
 グラフト型高分子としては、例えば、ポリエステル系分散剤等が挙げられる。具体的には、特開昭54-37082号公報、特表平8-507960号公報、特開2009-258668号公報等に記載のポリ(低級アルキレンイミン)とポリエステルの反応生成物、特開平9-169821号公報等に記載のポリアリルアミンとポリエステルの反応生成物、特開平10-339949号公報、特開2004-37986号公報等に記載のマクロモノマーと、窒素原子モノマーとの共重合体、特開2003-238837号公報、特開2008-9426号公報、特開2008-81732号公報等に記載の有機色素の部分骨格や複素環を有するグラフト型高分子、特開2010-106268号公報等に記載のマクロモノマーと酸基含有モノマーの共重合体、特開2009-203462号公報に記載の塩基性基と酸基を有する両性分散樹脂などが挙げられる。 Examples of the graft polymer include a polyester-based dispersant. Specifically, reaction products of poly (lower alkyleneimine) and polyester described in JP-A-54-37082, JP-A-8-507960, JP-A-2009-258668, etc. A reaction product of polyallylamine and polyester described in JP-A-169821 and the like, a copolymer of a macromonomer described in JP-A-10-339949, JP-A-2004-37986, and the like and a nitrogen atom monomer, JP-A-2003-238837, JP-A-2008-9426, JP-A-2008-81732, and the like, graft polymers having a partial skeleton or a heterocyclic ring of organic dyes, JP-A-2010-106268, etc. Copolymers of the described macromonomer and acid group-containing monomer, basic group and acid described in JP-A-2009-203462 Such amphoteric dispersion resin having the like.
 グラフト型高分子をラジカル重合で製造する際に用いるマクロモノマーとしては、公知のマクロモノマーを用いることができ、東亜合成(株)製のマクロモノマーAA-6(末端基がメタクリロイル基であるポリメタクリル酸メチル)、AS-6(末端基がメタクリロイル基であるポリスチレン)、AN-6S(末端基がメタクリロイル基であるスチレンとアクリロニトリルの共重合体)、AB-6(末端基がメタクリロイル基であるポリアクリル酸ブチル)、ダイセル化学工業(株)製のプラクセルFM5(メタクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチルのε-カプロラクトン5モル当量付加品)、FA10L(アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチルのε-カプロラクトン10モル当量付加品)、及び特開平2-272009号公報に記載のポリエステル系マクロモノマー等が挙げられる。 As the macromonomer used when the graft polymer is produced by radical polymerization, a known macromonomer can be used. Macromonomer AA-6 manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd. Acid-6), AS-6 (polystyrene whose terminal group is a methacryloyl group), AN-6S (a copolymer of styrene and acrylonitrile whose terminal group is a methacryloyl group), AB-6 (polyester whose terminal group is a methacryloyl group) Butyl acrylate), Placel FM5 manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd. (2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate with 5 molar equivalents of ε-caprolactone), FA10L (2-hydroxyethyl acrylate with 10 molar equivalents of ε-caprolactone) And polyesters described in JP-A-2-272009 System macromonomer and the like.
 ブロック型高分子としては、特開2003-49110号公報、特開2009-52010号公報等に記載のブロック型高分子が好ましい。 As the block polymer, block polymers described in JP-A Nos. 2003-49110 and 2009-52010 are preferable.
 顔料分散剤は、市販品としても入手可能であり、そのような具体例としては、
 
楠本化成株式会社製「DA-7301」、BYKChemie社製「Disperbyk-101(ポリアミドアミン燐酸塩)、107(カルボン酸エステル)、110(酸基を含む共重合物)、130(ポリアミド)、161、162、163、164、165、166、170(高分子共重合物)」、「BYK-P104、P105(高分子量不飽和ポリカルボン酸)、EFKA社製「EFKA4047、4050~4010~4165(ポリウレタン系)、EFKA4330~4340(ブロック共重合体)、4400~4402(変性ポリアクリレート)、5010(ポリエステルアミド)、5765(高分子量ポリカルボン酸塩)、6220(脂肪酸ポリエステル)、6745(フタロシアニン誘導体)、6750(アゾ顔料誘導体)」、味の素ファインテクノ社製「アジスパーPB821、PB822、PB880、PB881」、共栄社化学社製「フローレンTG-710(ウレタンオリゴマー)」、「ポリフローNo.50E、No.300(アクリル系共重合体)」、楠本化成株式会社製「ディスパロンKS-860、873SN、874、#2150(脂肪族多価カルボン酸)、#7004(ポリエーテルエステル)、DA-703-50、DA-705、DA-725」、花王社製「デモールRN、N(ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン重縮合物)、MS、C、SN-B(芳香族スルホン酸ホルマリン重縮合物)」、「ホモゲノールL-18(高分子ポリカルボン酸)」、「エマルゲン920、930、935、985(ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル)」、「アセタミン86(ステアリルアミンアセテート)」、日本ルーブリゾール(株)製「ソルスパース5000(フタロシアニン誘導体)、22000(アゾ顔料誘導体)、13240(ポリエステルアミン)、3000、17000、27000(末端部に機能部を有する高分子)、24000、28000、32000、38500(グラフト型高分子)」、日光ケミカル社製「ニッコールT106(ポリオキシエチレンソルビタンモノオレート)、MYS-IEX(ポリオキシエチレンモノステアレート)」、川研ファインケミカル(株)製 ヒノアクトT-8000E等、信越化学工業(株)製、オルガノシロキサンポリマーKP341、裕商(株)製「W001:カチオン系界面活性剤」、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル等のノニオン系界面活性剤、「W004、W005、W017」等のアニオン系界面活性剤、森下産業(株)製「EFKA-46、EFKA-47、EFKA-47EA、EFKAポリマー100、EFKAポリマー400、EFKAポリマー401、EFKAポリマー450」、サンノプコ(株)製「ディスパースエイド6、ディスパースエイド8、ディスパースエイド15、ディスパースエイド9100」等の高分子分散剤、(株)ADEKA製「アデカプルロニックL31、F38、L42、L44、L61、L64、F68、L72、P95、F77、P84、F87、P94、L101、P103、F108、L121、P-123」、及び三洋化成(株)製「イオネット(商品名)S-20」等が挙げられる。
The pigment dispersant is also available as a commercial product, and as such a specific example,

“DA-7301” manufactured by Enomoto Kasei Co., Ltd., “Disperbyk-101 (polyamide amine phosphate), 107 (carboxylic acid ester), BY (Chemical acid ester)” manufactured by BYK Chemie, 130 (polyamide), 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 170 (polymer copolymer) ”,“ BYK-P104, P105 (high molecular weight unsaturated polycarboxylic acid) ”,“ EFKA 4047, 4050-4010-4165 (polyurethane type) manufactured by EFKA Corporation ), EFKA 4330-4340 (block copolymer), 4400-4402 (modified polyacrylate), 5010 (polyester amide), 5765 (high molecular weight polycarboxylate), 6220 (fatty acid polyester), 6745 (phthalocyanine derivative), 6750 (Azo pigment derived ”,“ Ajispur PB821, PB822, PB880, PB881 ”manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine Techno Co., Ltd.,“ Floren TG-710 (urethane oligomer) ”manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.,“ Polyflow No. 50E, No. 300 (acrylic copolymer) ” "Disparon KS-860, 873SN, 874, # 2150 (aliphatic polycarboxylic acid), # 7004 (polyetherester), DA-703-50, DA-705, DA-725" manufactured by Enomoto Kasei Co., Ltd. "Demol RN, N (naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin polycondensate), MS, C, SN-B (aromatic sulfonic acid formalin polycondensate)", "Homogenol L-18 (polymer polycarboxylic acid)" ”,“ Emulgen 920, 930, 935, 985 (polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl) ”,“ Acetamine 86 (stearylamine acetate) ”,“ Solsperse 5000 (phthalocyanine derivative), 22000 (azo pigment derivative), 13240 (polyesteramine), 3000, 17000, 27000 (end part) manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd. ” 24000, 28000, 32000, 38500 (graft type polymer) "," Nikkor T106 (polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate), MYS-IEX (polyoxyethylene monostearate) "manufactured by Nikko Chemical Co., Ltd. ), Hinoact T-8000E manufactured by Kawaken Fine Chemical Co., Ltd., Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., organosiloxane polymer KP341, Yusho Co., Ltd. “W001: Cationic surfactant”, polyoxyethylene lauryl Nonionic surfactants such as ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octyl phenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonyl phenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester, Anionic surfactants such as “W004, W005, W017”, “EFKA-46, EFKA-47, EFKA-47EA, EFKA polymer 100, EFKA polymer 400, EFKA polymer 401, EFKA polymer 450” manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd., Polymer dispersants such as “Disperse Aid 6, Disperse Aid 8, Disperse Aid 15 and Disperse Aid 9100” manufactured by San Nopco Co., Ltd., ADEK Co., Ltd. “Adeka Pluronic L31, F38, L42, L44, L61, L64, F68, L72, P95, F77, P84, F87, P94, L101, P103, F108, L121, P-123” manufactured by A, and Sanyo Chemical Co., Ltd. “Ionet (trade name) S-20” manufactured by the Company and the like can be mentioned.
 着色組成物において、分散剤を含有する場合、分散剤の含有量は、顔料100質量部に対して、1~80質量部であることが好ましく、5~70質量部がより好ましく、10~60質量部であることがさらに好ましい。 When the coloring composition contains a dispersant, the content of the dispersant is preferably 1 to 80 parts by mass, more preferably 5 to 70 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. More preferably, it is part by mass.
<<<アルカリ可溶性樹脂>>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、樹脂としてアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有することができる。アルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有することにより、現像性およびパターン形成性が向上する。なお、アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、分散剤やバインダーとして用いることもできる。
<<< Alkali-soluble resin >>>
The coloring composition of this invention can contain alkali-soluble resin as resin. By containing an alkali-soluble resin, developability and pattern formability are improved. The alkali-soluble resin can also be used as a dispersant or a binder.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の分子量としては、特に定めるものではないが、重量平均分子量(Mw)が5000~100,000であることが好ましい。また、数平均分子量(Mn)は、1000~20,000であることが好ましい。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、線状有機高分子重合体であってもよく、分子(好ましくは、アクリル系共重合体、スチレン系共重合体を主鎖とする分子)中に少なくとも1つのアルカリ可溶性を促進する基を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂の中から適宜選択することができる。
The molecular weight of the alkali-soluble resin is not particularly defined, but the weight average molecular weight (Mw) is preferably 5000 to 100,000. The number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 1000 to 20,000.
The alkali-soluble resin may be a linear organic polymer, and has at least one alkali-soluble polymer in a molecule (preferably a molecule having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain). It can be suitably selected from alkali-soluble resins having groups to promote.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、耐熱性の観点からは、ポリヒドロキシスチレン系樹脂、ポリシロキサン系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、アクリル/アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂が好ましく、現像性制御の観点からは、アクリル系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、アクリル/アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂が好ましい。
 アルカリ可溶性を促進する基(以下、酸基ともいう)としては、例えば、カルボキシル基、リン酸基、スルホン酸基、フェノール性ヒドロキシル基などが挙げられるが、有機溶剤に可溶で弱アルカリ水溶液により現像可能なものが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸が特に好ましいものとして挙げられる。これら酸基は、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。
The alkali-soluble resin is preferably a polyhydroxystyrene resin, a polysiloxane resin, an acrylic resin, an acrylamide resin, or an acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resin from the viewpoint of heat resistance. Acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferred.
Examples of the group that promotes alkali solubility (hereinafter also referred to as an acid group) include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. What can be developed is preferable, and (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の製造には、例えば、公知のラジカル重合法による方法を適用することができる。ラジカル重合法でアルカリ可溶性樹脂を製造する際の温度、圧力、ラジカル開始剤の種類およびその量、溶媒の種類等々の重合条件は、当業者において容易に設定可能であり、実験的に条件を定めるようにすることもできる。 For the production of the alkali-soluble resin, for example, a known radical polymerization method can be applied. Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, type of solvent, etc. when producing an alkali-soluble resin by radical polymerization can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and the conditions are determined experimentally. It can also be done.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、側鎖にカルボン酸を有するポリマーが好ましく、メタクリル酸共重合体、アクリル酸共重合体、イタコン酸共重合体、クロトン酸共重合体、マレイン酸共重合体、部分エステル化マレイン酸共重合体、ノボラック型樹脂などのアルカリ可溶性フェノール樹脂等、並びに側鎖にカルボキシル基を有する酸性セルロース誘導体、ヒドロキシル基を有するポリマーに酸無水物を付加させたもの挙げられる。特に、(メタ)アクリル酸と、これと共重合可能な他のモノマーとの共重合体が、アルカリ可溶性樹脂として好適である。(メタ)アクリル酸と共重合可能な他のモノマーとしては、アルキル(メタ)アクリレート、アリール(メタ)アクリレート、ビニル化合物などが挙げられる。
アルキル(メタ)アクリレートおよびアリール(メタ)アクリレートとしては、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、ペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、オクチル(メタ)アクリレート、フェニル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、トリル(メタ)アクリレート、ナフチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、グリシジルメタクリレート、テトラヒドロフルフリルメタクリレート等を挙げることができる。ビニル化合物としては、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ビニルトルエン、アクリロニトリル、ビニルアセテート、N-ビニルピロリドン、ポリスチレンマクロモノマー、ポリメチルメタクリレートマクロモノマー等を挙げることができる。また、(メタ)アクリル酸と共重合可能な他のモノマーの例として、特開平10-300922号公報に記載のN位置換マレイミドモノマー、例えば、N―フェニルマレイミド、N-シクロヘキシルマレイミド等を挙げることができる。なお、これらの(メタ)アクリル酸と共重合可能な他のモノマーは1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。
As the alkali-soluble resin, a polymer having a carboxylic acid in the side chain is preferable, and a methacrylic acid copolymer, an acrylic acid copolymer, an itaconic acid copolymer, a crotonic acid copolymer, a maleic acid copolymer, and a partial esterification are used. Examples thereof include maleic acid copolymers, alkali-soluble phenol resins such as novolak resins, acidic cellulose derivatives having a carboxyl group in the side chain, and polymers having a hydroxyl group added with an acid anhydride. In particular, a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid and another monomer copolymerizable therewith is suitable as the alkali-soluble resin. Examples of other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid include alkyl (meth) acrylates, aryl (meth) acrylates, and vinyl compounds.
As alkyl (meth) acrylate and aryl (meth) acrylate, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate, Hexyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, tolyl (meth) acrylate, naphthyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl methacrylate, etc. Can be mentioned. Examples of the vinyl compound include styrene, α-methyl styrene, vinyl toluene, acrylonitrile, vinyl acetate, N-vinyl pyrrolidone, polystyrene macromonomer, polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer and the like. Examples of other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid include N-substituted maleimide monomers described in JP-A-10-300922, such as N-phenylmaleimide and N-cyclohexylmaleimide. Can do. In addition, only 1 type may be sufficient as the other monomer copolymerizable with these (meth) acrylic acids, and 2 or more types may be sufficient as it.
 また、本発明における着色組成物の架橋効率を向上させるために、重合性基を有したアルカリ可溶性樹脂を使用してもよい。重合性基としては、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基等が挙げられる。重合性基を有したアルカリ可溶性樹脂は、重合性基を側鎖に含有したアルカリ可溶性樹脂等が有用である。
 重合性基を含有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、ダイヤナ-ルNRシリーズ(三菱レイヨン株式会社製)、Photomer6173(COOH含有 polyurethane acrylic oligomer.Diamond Shamrock Co.Ltd.製)、ビスコートR-264、KSレジスト106(いずれも大阪有機化学工業株式会社製)、サイクロマーPシリーズ(例えば、ACA230AA)、プラクセル CF200シリーズ(いずれもダイセル化学工業株式会社製)、Ebecryl3800(ダイセルユーシービー株式会社製)、アクリキュア-RD-F8(日本触媒社製)などが挙げられる。
Moreover, in order to improve the crosslinking efficiency of the coloring composition in the present invention, an alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group may be used. Examples of the polymerizable group include a (meth) allyl group and a (meth) acryloyl group. As the alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group, an alkali-soluble resin containing a polymerizable group in a side chain is useful.
Examples of the alkali-soluble resin containing a polymerizable group include: Dial NR series (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Photomer 6173 (manufactured by COOH containing polyurethane acrylic oligomer. Diamond Shamrock Co. Ltd.), Biscote R-264, KS resist 106 (All manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Cyclomer P series (for example, ACA230AA), Plaxel CF200 series (all manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Ebecryl 3800 (manufactured by Daicel UCB Co., Ltd.), Acryl-RD- And F8 (manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.).
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート/(メタ)アクリル酸共重合体、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート/(メタ)アクリル酸/2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート共重合体、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート/(メタ)アクリル酸/他のモノマーからなる多元共重合体が好ましく用いることができる。また、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートを共重合したもの、特開平7-140654号公報に記載の、
2-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート/ポリスチレンマクロモノマー/ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体、2-ヒドロキシ-3-フェノキシプロピルアクリレート/ポリメチルメタクリレートマクロモノマー/ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体、
2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート/ポリスチレンマクロモノマー/メチルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート/ポリスチレンマクロモノマー/ベンジルメタクレート/メタクリル酸共重合体なども好ましく用いることができる。
 また、市販品としては、例えばアクリベースFF-426(藤倉化成社製)などを用いることもできる。
Alkali-soluble resins include benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid copolymer, benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate copolymer, benzyl (meth) acrylate / Multi-component copolymers composed of (meth) acrylic acid / other monomers can be preferably used. Further, a copolymer of 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, described in JP-A-7-140654,
2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxy-3-phenoxypropyl acrylate / polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer,
2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / methyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer and the like can also be preferably used.
As a commercial product, for example, Acrybase FF-426 (manufactured by Fujikura Kasei Co., Ltd.) can be used.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、下記一般式(ED1)で示される化合物および/または下記一般式(ED2)で表される化合物(以下、これらの化合物を「エーテルダイマー」と称することもある。)を含むモノマー成分を重合してなるポリマー(a)を含むことも好ましい。 The alkali-soluble resin is a monomer containing a compound represented by the following general formula (ED1) and / or a compound represented by the following general formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as “ether dimers”). It is also preferable to include a polymer (a) obtained by polymerizing the components.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
 一般式(ED1)中、R1およびR2は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052

 一般式(ED2)中、Rは、水素原子または炭素数1~30の有機基を表す。一般式(ED2)の具体例としては、特開2010-168539号公報の記載を参酌できる。
In general formula (ED1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052

In general formula (ED2), R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. As a specific example of the general formula (ED2), the description in JP 2010-168539 A can be referred to.
 一般式(ED1)中、R1およびR2で表される置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基としては、特に制限はないが、例えば、メチル、エチル、n-プロピル、イソプロピル、n-ブチル、イソブチル、tert-ブチル、tert-アミル、ステアリル、ラウリル、2-エチルヘキシル等の直鎖状または分岐状のアルキル基;フェニル等のアリール基;シクロヘキシル、tert-ブチルシクロヘキシル、ジシクロペンタジエニル、トリシクロデカニル、イソボルニル、アダマンチル、2-メチル-2-アダマンチル等の脂環式基;1-メトキシエチル、1-エトキシエチル等のアルコキシで置換されたアルキル基;ベンジル等のアリール基で置換されたアルキル基;等が挙げられる。これらの中でも特に、メチル、エチル、シクロヘキシル、ベンジル等のような酸や熱で脱離しにくい1級または2級炭素の置換基が耐熱性の点で好ましい。 In the general formula (ED1), the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent represented by R 1 and R 2 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include methyl, ethyl, n Linear or branched alkyl groups such as -propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, tert-amyl, stearyl, lauryl, 2-ethylhexyl; aryl groups such as phenyl; cyclohexyl, tert-butylcyclohexyl Alicyclic groups such as dicyclopentadienyl, tricyclodecanyl, isobornyl, adamantyl and 2-methyl-2-adamantyl; alkyl groups substituted with alkoxy such as 1-methoxyethyl and 1-ethoxyethyl; benzyl An alkyl group substituted with an aryl group such as; Among these, an acid such as methyl, ethyl, cyclohexyl, benzyl or the like, or a primary or secondary carbon substituent which is difficult to be removed by heat is preferable from the viewpoint of heat resistance.
 エーテルダイマーの具体例としては、例えば、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0317を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。エーテルダイマーは、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。一般式(ED)で示される化合物由来の構造体は、その他のモノマーを共重合させてもよい。 As a specific example of the ether dimer, for example, paragraph 0317 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. Only one type of ether dimer may be used, or two or more types may be used. The structure derived from the compound represented by the general formula (ED) may be copolymerized with other monomers.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、下記式(X)で示される化合物に由来する構造単位を含んでいてもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053

 式(X)において、R1は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、R2は炭素数2~10のアルキレン基を表し、R3は、水素原子またはベンゼン環を含んでもよい炭素数1~20のアルキル基を表す。nは1~15の整数を表す。
The alkali-soluble resin may contain a structural unit derived from a compound represented by the following formula (X).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053

In formula (X), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or a benzene ring that may contain a benzene ring. Represents an alkyl group. n represents an integer of 1 to 15.
 上記式(X)において、R2のアルキレン基の炭素数は、2~3が好ましい。また、R3のアルキル基の炭素数は1~20であるが、より好ましくは1~10であり、R3のアルキル基はベンゼン環を含んでもよい。R3で表されるベンゼン環を含むアルキル基としては、ベンジル基、2-フェニル(イソ)プロピル基等を挙げることができる。 In the above formula (X), the alkylene group of R 2 preferably has 2 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group of R 3 has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, and the alkyl group of R 3 may contain a benzene ring. Examples of the alkyl group containing a benzene ring represented by R 3 include a benzyl group and a 2-phenyl (iso) propyl group.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、特開2012-208494号公報段落0558~0571(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/0235099号明細書の<0685>~[0700])以降の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 さらに、特開2012-32767号公報に記載の段落番号0029~0063に記載の共重合体(B)および実施例で用いられているアルカリ可溶性樹脂、特開2012-208474号公報の段落番号0088~0098に記載のバインダー樹脂および実施例で用いられているバインダー樹脂、特開2012-137531号公報の段落番号0022~0032に記載のバインダー樹脂および実施例で用いられているバインダー樹脂、特開2013-024934号公報の段落番号0132~0143に記載のバインダー樹脂および実施例で用いられているバインダー樹脂、特開2011-242752号公報の段落番号0092~0098および実施例で用いられているバインダー樹脂、特開2012-032770号公報の段落番号0030~0072の記載のバインダー樹脂を用いることもできる。これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
As for the alkali-soluble resin, paragraphs 0558 to 0571 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding to <0685> to [0700] of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099) can be referred to, and the contents thereof can be referred to. It is incorporated herein.
Further, the copolymer (B) described in paragraph Nos. 0029 to 0063 described in JP 2012-32767 A and the alkali-soluble resin used in Examples, paragraph Nos. 0088 to 2020 of JP 2012-208474 A The binder resin described in 0098 and the binder resin used in Examples, the binder resin described in Paragraph Nos. 0022 to 0032 of JP 2012-137531 B, and the binder resin used in Examples, The binder resin described in paragraph Nos. 0132 to 0143 of No. 024934 and the binder resin used in Examples, the binder resin used in paragraph Nos. 0092 to 0098 and Examples of JP 2011-242752 A, Paragraph No. of Kokai 2012-032770 030 can also be used a binder resin according to ~ 0072. These contents are incorporated herein.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の酸価は、30~500mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、50mgKOH/g以上がより好ましく、70mgKOH/g以上が更に好ましい。上限は、400mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下がさらに好ましく、150mgKOH/g以下が特に好ましく、120mgKOH/g以下が一層も好ましい。 The acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH / g. The lower limit is more preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, and still more preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more. The upper limit is more preferably 400 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, particularly preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, and even more preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less.
 着色組成物がアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有する場合、アルカリ可溶性樹脂の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分に対して、1~15質量%が好ましく、2~12質量%がより好ましく、3~10質量%が更に好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、アルカリ可溶性樹脂を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 When the coloring composition contains an alkali-soluble resin, the content of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 1 to 15% by mass, more preferably 2 to 12% by mass, with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition. 10 mass% is still more preferable. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of alkali-soluble resin, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<顔料誘導体>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、顔料誘導体を含有することが好ましい。顔料誘導体は、有機顔料の一部分を、酸性基、塩基性基又はフタルイミドメチル基で置換した構造を有する化合物が好ましい。顔料誘導体としては、着色剤Aの分散性及び分散安定性の観点から、酸性基又は塩基性基を有する顔料誘導体が好ましい。特に好ましくは、塩基性基を有する顔料誘導体である。また、上述した樹脂(分散剤)と、顔料誘導体の組み合わせは、分散剤が酸性分散剤で、顔料誘導体が塩基性基を有する組み合わせが好ましい。
<< Pigment derivative >>
The colored composition of the present invention preferably contains a pigment derivative. The pigment derivative is preferably a compound having a structure in which a part of an organic pigment is substituted with an acidic group, a basic group or a phthalimidomethyl group. As the pigment derivative, from the viewpoint of dispersibility and dispersion stability of the colorant A, a pigment derivative having an acidic group or a basic group is preferable. Particularly preferred are pigment derivatives having a basic group. Further, the combination of the resin (dispersant) and the pigment derivative described above is preferably a combination in which the dispersant is an acidic dispersant and the pigment derivative has a basic group.
 顔料誘導体を構成するための有機顔料としては、ジケトピロロピロール系顔料、アゾ系顔料、フタロシアニン系顔料、アントラキノン系顔料、キナクリドン系顔料、ジオキサジン系顔料、ペリノン系顔料、ペリレン系顔料、チオインジゴ系顔料、イソインドリン系顔料、イソインドリノン系顔料、キノフタロン系顔料、スレン系顔料、金属錯体系顔料等が挙げられる。
 また、顔料誘導体が有する酸性基としては、スルホン酸基、カルボン酸基及びその塩が好ましく、カルボン酸基及びスルホン酸基がさらに好ましく、スルホン酸基が特に好ましい。顔料誘導体が有する塩基性基としては、アミノ基が好ましく、特に三級アミノ基が好ましい。
Examples of the organic pigment for constituting the pigment derivative include diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments, azo pigments, phthalocyanine pigments, anthraquinone pigments, quinacridone pigments, dioxazine pigments, perinone pigments, perylene pigments, thioindigo pigments , Isoindoline pigments, isoindolinone pigments, quinophthalone pigments, selenium pigments, metal complex pigments, and the like.
Moreover, as an acidic group which a pigment derivative has, a sulfonic acid group, a carboxylic acid group, and its salt are preferable, a carboxylic acid group and a sulfonic acid group are more preferable, and a sulfonic acid group is especially preferable. The basic group possessed by the pigment derivative is preferably an amino group, particularly preferably a tertiary amino group.
 本発明の着色組成物が顔料誘導体を含有する場合、顔料誘導体の含有量は、顔料の質量に対し、1~30質量%が好ましく、3~20質量%がさらに好ましい。顔料誘導体は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。 When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a pigment derivative, the content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 30% by mass, and more preferably 3 to 20% by mass with respect to the mass of the pigment. Only one pigment derivative may be used, or two or more pigment derivatives may be used in combination.
<<有機溶剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、有機溶剤を含有してもよい。
 有機溶剤は、各成分の溶解性や着色組成物の塗布性を満足すれば基本的には特に制限はないが、着色剤、硬化性化合物等の溶解性、塗布性、安全性を考慮して選ばれることが好ましい。
<< Organic solvent >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain an organic solvent.
The organic solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as the solubility of each component and the coating property of the coloring composition are satisfied, but in consideration of the solubility, coating property, and safety of the colorant and the curable compound. It is preferable to be selected.
 有機溶剤としては、エステル類として、例えば、酢酸エチル、酢酸-n-ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、酢酸シクロヘキシル、ギ酸アミル、酢酸イソアミル、プロピオン酸ブチル、酪酸イソプロピル、酪酸エチル、酪酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、オキシ酢酸アルキル(例:オキシ酢酸メチル、オキシ酢酸エチル、オキシ酢酸ブチル(例えば、メトキシ酢酸メチル、メトキシ酢酸エチル、メトキシ酢酸ブチル、エトキシ酢酸メチル、エトキシ酢酸エチル等))、3-オキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例:3-オキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-オキシプロピオン酸エチル等(例えば、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル等))、2-オキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例:2-オキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-オキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-オキシプロピオン酸プロピル等(例えば、2-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル))、2-オキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチルおよび2-オキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル(例えば、2-メトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル等)、ピルビン酸メチル、ピルビン酸エチル、ピルビン酸プロピル、アセト酢酸メチル、アセト酢酸エチル、2-オキソブタン酸メチル、2-オキソブタン酸エチル等、並びに、エーテル類として、例えば、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールエチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールプロピルエーテルアセテート等、並びに、ケトン類として、例えば、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、2-ヘプタノン、3-ヘプタノン等、並びに、芳香族炭化水素類として、例えば、トルエン、キシレン等が好適に挙げられる。 Examples of organic solvents include esters such as ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, cyclohexyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, and ethyl lactate. , Alkyl oxyacetates (eg, methyl oxyacetate, ethyl oxyacetate, butyl oxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate)), alkyl 3-oxypropionate Esters (eg, methyl 3-oxypropionate, ethyl 3-oxypropionate, etc. (eg, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, etc.) )) 2-oxypropionic acid alkyl esters (eg, methyl 2-oxypropionate, ethyl 2-oxypropionate, propyl 2-oxypropionate, etc. (for example, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, 2 -Propyl methoxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)), methyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate and ethyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate (eg 2-methoxy- Methyl 2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.), methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl 2-oxobutanoate, 2-oxobutanoic acid Ethyl etc., and ether As, for example, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol methyl ether Acetate, propylene glycol ethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol propyl ether acetate, etc., and ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone and aromatic hydrocarbons For example, toluene, xylene and the like are preferable.
 これらの有機溶剤は、色素(A)、硬化性化合物等の溶解性、塗布面状の改良などの観点から、2種以上を混合することも好ましい。この場合、特に好ましくは、上記の3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテル、及びプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテートから選択される2種以上で構成される混合溶液である。
 本発明において、有機溶剤は、過酸化物の含有率が0.8mmol/L以下であることが好ましく、過酸化物を実質的に含まないことがより好ましい。
It is also preferable to mix two or more of these organic solvents from the viewpoints of solubility of the dye (A), the curable compound, and the like, and improvement of the coating surface condition. In this case, particularly preferably, the above methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, ethyl It is a mixed solution composed of two or more selected from carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
In the present invention, the organic solvent preferably has a peroxide content of 0.8 mmol / L or less, and more preferably contains substantially no peroxide.
 有機溶剤の着色組成物中における含有量は、塗布性の観点から、着色組成物の全固形分濃度が5%~80質量%になる量とすることが好ましく、5~60質量%がさらに好ましく、10~50質量%が特に好ましい。
 本発明の着色組成物は、有機溶剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The content of the organic solvent in the colored composition is preferably such that the total solid concentration of the colored composition is 5% to 80% by mass, and more preferably 5 to 60% by mass, from the viewpoint of applicability. 10 to 50% by mass is particularly preferable.
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of organic solvent or two or more types of organic solvents. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<重合禁止剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物においては、着色組成物の製造中又は保存中において、重合性化合物の不要な熱重合を阻止するために、少量の重合禁止剤を添加することが望ましい。
 重合禁止剤としては、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-t-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、t-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4'-チオビス(3-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、2,2'-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミン第一セリウム塩等が挙げられる。
 本発明の着色組成物が重合禁止剤を含有する場合、重合禁止剤の含有量は、着色組成物の質量に対して、0.01~5質量%が好ましい。
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合禁止剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<< Polymerization inhibitor >>
In the colored composition of the present invention, it is desirable to add a small amount of a polymerization inhibitor in order to prevent unnecessary thermal polymerization of the polymerizable compound during the production or storage of the colored composition.
Polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine primary cerium salt and the like.
When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a polymerization inhibitor, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass with respect to the mass of the coloring composition.
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<界面活性剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物には、塗布性をより向上させる観点から、各種の界面活性剤を添加してもよい。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用できる。
<< Surfactant >>
Various surfactants may be added to the colored composition of the present invention from the viewpoint of further improving coatability. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
 例えば、フッ素系界面活性剤を含有することで、塗布液として調製したときの液特性(特に、流動性)がより向上する。即ち、フッ素系界面活性剤を含有する着色組成物を用いて膜形成する場合においては、被塗布面と塗布液との界面張力を低下させることにより、被塗布面への濡れ性が改善され、被塗布面への塗布性が向上する。このため、少量の液量で数μm程度の薄膜を形成した場合であっても、厚みムラの小さい均一厚の膜形成をより好適に行える点で有効である。 For example, by containing a fluorosurfactant, the liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid are further improved. That is, in the case of forming a film using a coloring composition containing a fluorosurfactant, the wettability to the coated surface is improved by reducing the interfacial tension between the coated surface and the coating liquid, The coating property to the coated surface is improved. For this reason, even when a thin film of about several μm is formed with a small amount of liquid, it is effective in that it is possible to more suitably form a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness.
 フッ素系界面活性剤中のフッ素含有率は、3~40質量%が好適であり、より好ましくは5~30質量%であり、特に好ましくは7~25質量%である。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、着色組成物中における溶解性も良好である。 The fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass. A fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in a colored composition.
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、例えば、メガファックF171、同F172、同F173、同F176、同F177、同F141、同F142、同F143、同F144、同R30、同F437、同F475、同F479、同F482、同F554、同F780、同F781(以上、DIC(株)製)、フロラードFC430、同FC431、同FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-382、同SC-101、同SC-103、同SC-104、同SC-105、同SC1068、同SC-381、同SC-383、同S393、同KH-40(以上、旭硝子(株)製)、PolyFox(登録商標) PF-636、PF-656、PF-6320、PF-6520、PF-7002(OMNOVA社製)等が挙げられる。
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、特開2010-32698号公報に記載のフッ素系界面活性剤を用いることもできる。
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、ブロックポリマーを用いることもでき、具体例としては、例えば特開2011-89090号公報に記載された化合物が挙げられる。
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基および/またはプロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、を含む含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましく用いることができる。
 また、エチレン性不飽和基を側鎖に有する含フッ素重合体をフッ素系界面活性剤として用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2010-164965号公報0050~0090段落および0289~0295段落に記載された化合物、例えばDIC社製のメガファックRS-101、RS-102、RS-718K等が挙げられる。
Examples of the fluorosurfactant include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, F780, F781 (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, Same SC-103, Same SC-104, Same SC-105, Same SC1068, Same SC-381, Same SC-383, Same S393, Same KH-40 (above, manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PolyFox (registered trademark) PF-636, PF-656, PF-6320, PF-6520, PF-7002 (manufactured by OMNOVA), etc. It is done.
As the fluorosurfactant, a fluorosurfactant described in JP 2010-32698 A can also be used.
As the fluorosurfactant, a block polymer can be used. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-89090.
The fluorosurfactant has 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) repeating units derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and an alkyleneoxy group (preferably an ethyleneoxy group and / or a propyleneoxy group) ( A fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound can also be preferably used.
Moreover, the fluoropolymer which has an ethylenically unsaturated group in a side chain can also be used as a fluorine-type surfactant. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A 2010-164965, paragraphs 0050 to 0090 and paragraphs 0289 to 0295, such as MegaFac RS-101, RS-102, and RS-718K manufactured by DIC.
 ノニオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、グリセロール、トリメチロールプロパン、トリメチロールエタン並びにそれらのエトキシレートおよびプロポキシレート(例えば、グリセロールプロポキシレート、グリセリンエトキシレート等)、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル(BASF社製のプルロニックL10、L31、L61、L62、10R5、17R2、25R2、テトロニック304、701、704、901、904、150R1)、ソルスパース20000(日本ルーブリゾール(株))等が挙げられる。また、竹本油脂(株)製のパイオニンD-6112-W、和光純薬工業社製の、NCW-101、NCW-1001、NCW-1002を使用することもできる。 Specific examples of the nonionic surfactant include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, and ethoxylates and propoxylates thereof (for example, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene Stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester (Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62 manufactured by BASF, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2, Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1) Solsperse 20000 (Lubrizol Japan Co., Ltd.), and the like. Alternatively, Pionein D-6112-W manufactured by Takemoto Yushi Co., Ltd., NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002 manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. may be used.
 カチオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、フタロシアニン誘導体(商品名:EFKA-745、森下産業(株)製)、オルガノシロキサンポリマーKP341(信越化学工業(株)製)、(メタ)アクリル酸系(共)重合体ポリフローNo.75、No.90、No.95(共栄社化学(株)製)、W001(裕商(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the cationic surfactant include phthalocyanine derivatives (trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 アニオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、W004、W005、W017(裕商(株)社製)等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of anionic surfactants include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製「トーレシリコーンDC3PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH7PA」、「トーレシリコーンDC11PA」,「トーレシリコーンSH21PA」,「トーレシリコーンSH28PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH29PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH30PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH8400」、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製「TSF-4440」、「TSF-4300」、「TSF-4445」、「TSF-4460」、「TSF-4452」、信越シリコーン株式会社製「KP341」、「KF6001」、「KF6002」、ビックケミー社製「BYK307」、「BYK323」、「BYK330」等が挙げられる。 Examples of the silicone surfactant include “Toray Silicone DC3PA”, “Toray Silicone SH7PA”, “Toray Silicone DC11PA”, “Tore Silicone SH21PA”, “Tore Silicone SH28PA”, “Toray Silicone” manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd. Silicone SH29PA, Torre Silicone SH30PA, Torre Silicone SH8400, Momentive Performance Materials TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF -4552 "," KP341 "," KF6001 "," KF6002 "manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.," BYK307 "," BYK323 "," BYK330 "manufactured by BYK Chemie.
 本発明の着色組成物が界面活性剤を含有する場合、界面活性剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全質量に対して、0.001~2.0質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは0.005~1.0質量%である。
 本発明の着色組成物は、界面活性剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a surfactant, the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.001%, based on the total mass of the coloring composition. 005 to 1.0% by mass.
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of surfactant or two or more types of surfactant. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<<その他添加剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物には、必要に応じて、各種添加物、例えば、充填剤、密着促進剤、酸化防止剤、紫外線吸収剤、凝集防止剤等を配合することができる。これらの添加物としては、特開2004-295116号公報の段落0155~0156に記載のものを挙げることができ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 本発明の着色組成物においては、特開2004-295116号公報の段落0078に記載の増感剤や光安定剤、同公報の段落0081に記載の熱重合防止剤を含有することができる。
<< Other additives >>
Various additives, for example, fillers, adhesion promoters, antioxidants, ultraviolet absorbers, anti-aggregation agents, and the like can be blended with the colored composition of the present invention as necessary. Examples of these additives include those described in JP-A No. 2004-295116, paragraphs 0155 to 0156, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a sensitizer and a light stabilizer described in paragraph 0078 of JP-A No. 2004-295116 and a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0081 of the same publication.
 用いる原料等により着色組成物中に金属元素が含まれることがあるが、欠陥発生抑制等の観点で、着色組成物中の第2族元素(カルシウム、マグネシウム等)の含有量は50ppm以下であることが好ましく、0.01~10ppmに制御することが好ましい。また、着色組成物中の無機金属塩の総量は100ppm以下であることが好ましく、0.5~50ppmに制御することがより好ましい。 Depending on the raw materials used, the colored composition may contain a metal element, but from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of defects, the content of Group 2 elements (calcium, magnesium, etc.) in the colored composition is 50 ppm or less. It is preferable to control to 0.01 to 10 ppm. The total amount of the inorganic metal salt in the coloring composition is preferably 100 ppm or less, and more preferably controlled to 0.5 to 50 ppm.
<着色組成物の調製方法>
 本発明の着色組成物は、前述の成分を混合することで調製される。
 着色組成物の調製に際しては、着色組成物を構成する各成分を一括配合してもよいし、各成分を溶剤に溶解・分散した後に逐次配合してもよい。また、配合する際の投入順序や作業条件は特に制約を受けない。例えば、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解・分散して組成物を調製してもよいし、必要に応じては、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液・分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して組成物として調製してもよい。
 本発明の着色組成物は、異物の除去や欠陥の低減などの目的で、フィルタでろ過することが好ましい。フィルタとしては、従来からろ過用途等に用いられているものであれば特に限定されることなく用いることができる。例えば、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン(PTFE)等のフッ素樹脂、ナイロン(例えばナイロン-6、ナイロン-6,6)等のポリアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン(PP)等のポリオレフィン樹脂(高密度、超高分子量を含む)等によるフィルタが挙げられる。これら素材の中でもポリプロピレン(高密度ポリプロピレンを含む)およびナイロンが好ましい。
 フィルタの孔径は、0.01~7.0μm程度が適しており、好ましくは0.01~3.0μm程度、さらに好ましくは0.05~0.5μm程度である。この範囲とすることにより、後工程において均一及び平滑な着色組成物の調製を阻害する、微細な異物を確実に除去することが可能となる。また、ファイバ状のろ材を用いることも好ましく、ろ材としては例えばポリプロピレンファイバ、ナイロンファイバ、グラスファイバ等が挙げられ、具体的にはロキテクノ社製のSBPタイプシリーズ(SBP008など)、TPRタイプシリーズ(TPR002、TPR005など)、SHPXタイプシリーズ(SHPX003など)のフィルタカートリッジを用いることができる。
<Method for preparing colored composition>
The coloring composition of the present invention is prepared by mixing the aforementioned components.
In preparing the colored composition, the components constituting the colored composition may be blended together, or may be blended sequentially after each component is dissolved and dispersed in a solvent. In addition, there are no particular restrictions on the charging order and working conditions when blending. For example, the composition may be prepared by dissolving and dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time. If necessary, each component may be suitably used as two or more solutions / dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be mixed to prepare a composition.
The colored composition of the present invention is preferably filtered with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances or reducing defects. Any filter can be used without particular limitation as long as it has been conventionally used for filtration. For example, fluororesin such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyamide resin such as nylon (eg nylon-6, nylon-6,6), polyolefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (high density, ultra high molecular weight) For example). Among these materials, polypropylene (including high density polypropylene) and nylon are preferable.
The pore size of the filter is suitably about 0.01 to 7.0 μm, preferably about 0.01 to 3.0 μm, more preferably about 0.05 to 0.5 μm. By setting it as this range, it becomes possible to remove reliably the fine foreign material which inhibits preparation of the uniform and smooth coloring composition in a post process. Further, it is also preferable to use a fiber-shaped filter medium, and examples of the filter medium include polypropylene fiber, nylon fiber, glass fiber, and the like. , TPR005, etc.) and SHPX type series (SHPX003 etc.) filter cartridges can be used.
 フィルタを使用する際、異なるフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。その際、第1のフィルタでのフィルタリングは、1回のみでもよいし、2回以上行ってもよい。
 また、上述した範囲内で異なる孔径の第1のフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。ここでの孔径は、フィルタメーカーの公称値を参照することができる。市販のフィルタとしては、例えば、日本ポール株式会社、アドバンテック東洋株式会社、日本インテグリス株式会社(旧日本マイクロリス株式会社)又は株式会社キッツマイクロフィルタ等が提供する各種フィルタの中から選択することができる。
 第2のフィルタは、上述した第1のフィルタと同様の材料等で形成されたものを使用することができる。
 例えば、第1のフィルタでのフィルタリングは、分散液のみで行い、他の成分を混合した後で、第2のフィルタリングを行ってもよい。
When using filters, different filters may be combined. At that time, the filtering by the first filter may be performed only once or may be performed twice or more.
Moreover, you may combine the 1st filter of a different hole diameter within the range mentioned above. The pore diameter here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer. As a commercially available filter, for example, it can be selected from various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd., Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.) or KITZ Micro Filter Co., Ltd. .
As the second filter, a filter formed of the same material as the first filter described above can be used.
For example, the filtering by the first filter may be performed only with the dispersion, and the second filtering may be performed after mixing other components.
<カラーフィルタ、パターン形成方法、カラーフィルタの製造方法>
 次に、本発明のカラーフィルタ、パターン形成方法およびカラーフィルタについて、その製造方法を通じて詳述する。また、本発明のパターン形成方法を用いたカラーフィルタの製造方法についても説明する。
<Color filter, pattern formation method, color filter manufacturing method>
Next, the color filter, pattern forming method and color filter of the present invention will be described in detail through the manufacturing method. A method for producing a color filter using the pattern forming method of the present invention will also be described.
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、本発明の着色組成物を用いてなるものである。
 本発明のパターン形成方法は、本発明の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する工程と、着色成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成する工程とを経て製造することができる。さらに、必要に応じて、着色組成物層をベークする工程(プリベーク工程)、および、現像された着色パターンをベークする工程(ポストベーク工程)を設けてもよい。以下、各工程について詳細を述べる。
The color filter of the present invention is obtained by using the colored composition of the present invention.
The pattern forming method of the present invention includes a step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, a step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern, and developing and removing unexposed portions. And a process of forming a colored pattern. Furthermore, you may provide the process (prebaking process) of baking a colored composition layer, and the process (post-baking process) of baking the developed coloring pattern as needed. Details of each step will be described below.
<<着色組成物層を形成する工程>>
 着色組成物層を形成する工程では、本発明の着色組成物を用いて、支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する。
<< Step of Forming Colored Composition Layer >>
In the step of forming the colored composition layer, the colored composition layer is formed on the support using the colored composition of the present invention.
 支持体としては、例えば、ガラス、シリコン、ポリカーボネート、ポリエステル、芳香族ポリアミド、ポリアミドイミド、ポリイミド等の透明基板を挙げることができる。これらの透明基板上に、有機EL素子を駆動するための薄膜トランジスタが形成されていてもよい。
 また、基板上にCCDやCMOS等の固体撮像素子(受光素子)が設けられた固体撮像素子用基板を用いることができる。
Examples of the support include transparent substrates such as glass, silicon, polycarbonate, polyester, aromatic polyamide, polyamideimide, and polyimide. A thin film transistor for driving the organic EL element may be formed on these transparent substrates.
Further, a solid-state imaging device substrate in which a solid-state imaging device (light receiving element) such as a CCD or CMOS is provided on the substrate can be used.
 支持体上への本発明の着色組成物の適用方法としては、スリット塗布、インクジェット法、回転塗布、流延塗布、ロール塗布、スクリーン印刷法等の各種の方法を用いることができる。 As a method for applying the colored composition of the present invention on the support, various methods such as slit coating, ink jet method, spin coating, cast coating, roll coating, screen printing method and the like can be used.
 支持体上に形成した着色組成物層は、加熱(プリベーク)することが好ましい。加熱は、120℃以下で行うことが好ましく、50~120℃がより好ましく、80~110℃がさらに好ましく、90~105℃が特に好ましい。加熱を120℃以下で行うことにより、画像表示装置の発光光源として有機EL素子を用いた場合や、イメージセンサーの光電変換膜を有機素材で構成した場合において、これらの特性をより効果的に維持することができる。
 加熱時間は、10秒~300秒が好ましく、40~250秒がより好ましく、80~220秒がさらに好ましい。加熱は、ホットプレート、オーブン等で行うことができる。
The colored composition layer formed on the support is preferably heated (pre-baked). The heating is preferably performed at 120 ° C. or less, more preferably 50 to 120 ° C., further preferably 80 to 110 ° C., and particularly preferably 90 to 105 ° C. By performing heating at 120 ° C. or lower, these characteristics are more effectively maintained when an organic EL element is used as the light source of the image display device or when the photoelectric conversion film of the image sensor is made of an organic material. can do.
The heating time is preferably 10 seconds to 300 seconds, more preferably 40 to 250 seconds, and further preferably 80 to 220 seconds. Heating can be performed with a hot plate, oven, or the like.
<<露光工程>>
 次に、支持体上に形成した着色組成物層を、パターン状に露光する(露光工程)。例えば、支持体上に形成した着色組成物層に対し、ステッパー等の露光装置を用いて、所定のマスクパターンを有するマスクを介して露光することで、パターン露光することができる。これにより、露光部分を硬化することができる。
 露光に際して用いることができる放射線(光)としては、g線、i線等の紫外線が好ましく(特に好ましくはi線)用いられる。照射量(露光量)は、例えば、0.03~2.5J/cm2が好ましく、0.05~1.0J/cm2がより好ましく、0.08~0.5J/cm2が最も好ましい。
 露光時における酸素濃度については適宜選択することができ、大気下で行う他に、例えば酸素濃度が19体積%以下の低酸素雰囲気下(例えば、15体積%、5体積%、実質的に無酸素)で露光してもよく、酸素濃度が21体積%を超える高酸素雰囲気下(例えば、22体積%、30体積%、50体積%)で露光してもよい。また、露光照度は適宜設定することが可能であり、通常1000W/m2~100000W/m2(例えば、5000W/m2、15000W/m2、35000W/m2)の範囲から選択することができる。酸素濃度と露光照度は適宜条件を組み合わせてよく、例えば、酸素濃度10体積%で照度10000W/m2、酸素濃度35体積%で照度20000W/m2などとすることができる。
<< Exposure process >>
Next, the colored composition layer formed on the support is exposed in a pattern (exposure process). For example, pattern exposure can be performed by exposing the colored composition layer formed on the support using a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using an exposure apparatus such as a stepper. Thereby, an exposed part can be hardened.
As radiation (light) that can be used for exposure, ultraviolet rays such as g-line and i-line are preferable (particularly preferably i-line). Irradiation dose (exposure dose), for example, preferably 0.03 ~ 2.5J / cm 2, more preferably 0.05 ~ 1.0J / cm 2, most preferably 0.08 ~ 0.5J / cm 2 .
The oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be appropriately selected. In addition to being performed in the atmosphere, for example, in a low oxygen atmosphere having an oxygen concentration of 19% by volume or less (for example, 15% by volume, 5% by volume, substantially oxygen-free). ), Or in a high oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration exceeding 21% by volume (for example, 22% by volume, 30% by volume, 50% by volume). Further, the exposure illuminance can be set as appropriate, and can usually be selected from the range of 1000 W / m 2 to 100,000 W / m 2 (eg, 5000 W / m 2 , 15000 W / m 2 , 35000 W / m 2 ). . Oxygen concentration and exposure illuminance may appropriately combined conditions, for example, illuminance 10000 W / m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 10 vol%, oxygen concentration of 35 vol% can be such illuminance 20000W / m 2.
 硬化膜の膜厚は1.0μm以下が好ましく、0.1~0.9μmがより好ましく、0.2~0.8μmがさらに好ましい。膜厚を、1.0μm以下とすることにより、高解像性、高密着性が得られ易い。 The thickness of the cured film is preferably 1.0 μm or less, more preferably 0.1 to 0.9 μm, and further preferably 0.2 to 0.8 μm. By setting the film thickness to 1.0 μm or less, high resolution and high adhesion can be easily obtained.
<<現像工程>>
 次に、未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成する。未露光部の現像除去は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。これにより、露光工程における未露光部の着色組成物層が現像液に溶出し、光硬化した部分だけが残る。
 現像液としては、下地の固体撮像素子や回路などにダメージを起さない、有機アルカリ現像液が望ましい。
 現像液の温度は、例えば、20~30℃が好ましい。現像時間は、20~180秒が好ましい。
<< Development process >>
Next, the unexposed portion is developed and removed to form a colored pattern. The development removal of the unexposed portion can be performed using a developer. Thereby, the coloring composition layer of the unexposed part in an exposure process elutes in a developing solution, and only the photocured part remains.
As the developer, an organic alkali developer that does not damage the underlying solid-state imaging device or circuit is desirable.
The temperature of the developer is preferably 20 to 30 ° C., for example. The development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds.
 現像液に用いるアルカリ剤としては、例えば、アンモニア水、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5、4、0]-7-ウンデセンなどの有機アルカリ性化合物が挙げられる。これらのアルカリ剤を濃度が0.001~10質量%、好ましくは0.01~1質量%となるように純水で希釈したアルカリ性水溶液が現像液として好ましく使用される。
 また、現像液には無機アルカリを用いてもよい。無機アルカリとしては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、硅酸ナトリウム、メタ硅酸ナトリウムなどが好ましい。
 また、現像液には、界面活性剤を用いてもよい。界面活性剤の例としては、前述した界面活性剤が挙げられ、ノニオン系界面活性剤が好ましい。現像液が界面活性剤を含有する場合、現像液の全質量に対して、0.001~2.0質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは0.01~1.0質量%である。
 なお、このようなアルカリ性水溶液からなる現像液を使用した場合には、一般に現像後純水で洗浄(リンス)することが好ましい。
Examples of the alkaline agent used in the developer include ammonia water, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide. And organic alkaline compounds such as choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5,4,0] -7-undecene. An alkaline aqueous solution obtained by diluting these alkaline agents with pure water so as to have a concentration of 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass, is preferably used as the developer.
Moreover, you may use an inorganic alkali for a developing solution. As the inorganic alkali, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium oxalate, sodium metasuccinate and the like are preferable.
Further, a surfactant may be used for the developer. Examples of the surfactant include the above-described surfactants, and nonionic surfactants are preferable. When the developer contains a surfactant, the amount is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by weight, more preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by weight, based on the total weight of the developer.
In addition, when using the developing solution which consists of such alkaline aqueous solution, generally it is preferable to wash | clean (rinse) with a pure water after image development.
 現像後、乾燥を施した後に加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行うことが好ましい。多色の着色パターンを形成するのであれば、色ごとに工程を順次繰り返して硬化膜を製造することができる。これによりカラーフィルタが得られる。
 ポストベークは、硬化を促進するための現像後の加熱処理であり、加熱温度は、例えば100~240℃が好ましい。また、画像表示装置の発光光源として有機EL素子を用いた場合や、イメージセンサーの光電変換膜を有機素材で構成した場合は、50~120℃(より好ましくは80~100℃、さらに好ましくは80~90℃)で加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行うことが好ましい。
 ポストベーク処理は、現像後の膜を、上記条件になるようにホットプレートやコンベクションオーブン(熱風循環式乾燥機)、高周波加熱機等の加熱手段を用いて、連続式あるいはバッチ式で行うことができる。
It is preferable to perform heat treatment (post-bake) after development and drying. If a multicolor coloring pattern is formed, a cured film can be produced by sequentially repeating the process for each color. Thereby, a color filter is obtained.
Post-baking is a heat treatment after development for accelerating curing, and the heating temperature is preferably 100 to 240 ° C., for example. Further, when an organic EL element is used as the light source of the image display device, or when the photoelectric conversion film of the image sensor is made of an organic material, it is 50 to 120 ° C. (more preferably 80 to 100 ° C., more preferably 80 ° C. It is preferable to perform heat treatment (post-bake) at a temperature of ~ 90 ° C.
The post-baking treatment can be carried out continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer) or a high-frequency heater so that the film after development is in the above condition. it can.
 また、本発明においては、硬化性化合物として重合性化合物を用い、かつ、上述した光重合開始剤(a)と光重合開始剤(b)とを含む着色組成物を用いた場合においては、上記露光工程において、波長350nmを超え380nm以下の光(好ましくは、波長355~370nmの光、特に好ましくはi線)で露光を行い、現像工程後の着色組成物層に対して、更に、波長254~350nmの光(好ましくは波長254nmの光)で露光行うことも好ましい。
 また、上述した現像工程前の露光で用いられる光の波長と、現像工程後の露光で用いられる光の波長の差は、200nm以下であることが好ましく、100~150nm以下であることがより好ましい。
 現像工程前および現像工程後の2段階で着色組成物層を露光することにより、最初の露光で着色組成物を適度に硬化させることができ、次の露光で着色組成物全体をほぼ硬化させることができる。結果として、210℃程度のポストベークのない低温条件でも、着色組成物の硬化性を向上させることができ、カラーフィルタの耐溶剤性を良好にすることができる。また、他色との混色を抑制することもできる。
In the present invention, when a polymerizable compound is used as the curable compound and a colored composition containing the above-described photopolymerization initiator (a) and photopolymerization initiator (b) is used, In the exposure step, exposure is performed with light having a wavelength of more than 350 nm and not more than 380 nm (preferably, light having a wavelength of 355 to 370 nm, particularly preferably i-line), and further to the colored composition layer after the development step, the wavelength 254 It is also preferable to perform exposure with light having a wavelength of ˜350 nm (preferably light having a wavelength of 254 nm).
Further, the difference between the wavelength of light used in the exposure before the development step and the wavelength of light used in the exposure after the development step is preferably 200 nm or less, and more preferably 100 to 150 nm or less. .
By exposing the colored composition layer in two stages before the development process and after the development process, the colored composition can be appropriately cured in the first exposure, and the entire colored composition is substantially cured in the next exposure. Can do. As a result, the curability of the colored composition can be improved even under a low temperature condition without post-baking at about 210 ° C., and the solvent resistance of the color filter can be improved. Moreover, color mixing with other colors can also be suppressed.
 現像工程前の露光における、波長350nmを超え380nm以下の光の照射量(露光量)は、30mJ/cm2~1500mJ/cm2が好ましく、50mJ/cm2~100
0mJ/cm2がより好ましい。
 また、現像工程前の露光での重合性化合物の反応率は、30~60%であることが好ましい。このような反応率にすることにより重合性化合物を適度に硬化させた状態にすることができる。ここで、重合性化合物を有する化合物の反応率とは、重合性化合物が有する全不飽和二重結合中の反応した不飽和二重結合の割合をいう。
In the exposure prior to the development step, the irradiation amount of 380nm or less light than the wavelength 350 nm (exposure) is preferably 30mJ / cm 2 ~ 1500mJ / cm 2, 50mJ / cm 2 ~ 100
0 mJ / cm 2 is more preferable.
The reaction rate of the polymerizable compound in the exposure before the development step is preferably 30 to 60%. By setting such a reaction rate, the polymerizable compound can be appropriately cured. Here, the reaction rate of the compound having a polymerizable compound refers to the ratio of the reacted unsaturated double bond in all the unsaturated double bonds of the polymerizable compound.
 現像工程後の露光における、波長254~300nmの光の照射量(露光量)は、30mJ/cm2~4000mJ/cm2が好ましく、50mJ/cm2~3500mJ/cm2がより好ましい。
 また、現像工程後の露光での重合性化合物の反応率は、60~90%であることが好ましい。このような反応率にすることにより、露光後の着色組成物層の硬化状態をより良好にすることができる。
In the exposure after the development step, the irradiation amount of light of wavelength 254 ~ 300 nm (exposure) is preferably 30mJ / cm 2 ~ 4000mJ / cm 2, 50mJ / cm 2 ~ 3500mJ / cm 2 is more preferable.
Further, the reaction rate of the polymerizable compound in the exposure after the development step is preferably 60 to 90%. By setting it as such a reaction rate, the hardening state of the coloring composition layer after exposure can be made more favorable.
 この態様においても、現像工程後の露光を行った後、更に、ポストベークを行ってもよいが、画像表示装置の発光光源として有機EL素子を用いた場合や、イメージセンサーの光電変換膜を有機素材で構成した場合は、50~120℃(より好ましくは80~100℃、さらに好ましくは80~90℃)で加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行うことが好ましい。 Also in this aspect, post-baking may be performed after exposure after the development step. However, when an organic EL element is used as a light source of an image display device, or a photoelectric conversion film of an image sensor is organic. In the case of a material, it is preferable to perform heat treatment (post-bake) at 50 to 120 ° C. (more preferably 80 to 100 ° C., more preferably 80 to 90 ° C.).
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、CCD、CMOS等の固体撮像素子に好適に用いることができ、特に100万画素を超えるような高解像度のCCDやCMOS等に好適である。本発明のカラーフィルタは、例えば、CCDまたはCMOSを構成する各画素の受光部と、集光するためのマイクロレンズと、の間に配置されるカラーフィルタとして用いることができる。 The color filter of the present invention can be suitably used for a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD or CMOS, and is particularly suitable for a CCD or CMOS having a high resolution exceeding 1 million pixels. The color filter of the present invention can be used as, for example, a color filter disposed between a light receiving portion of each pixel constituting a CCD or CMOS and a microlens for condensing light.
 また、本発明のカラーフィルタは、有機EL素子用として好ましく用いることができる。有機EL素子としては、白色有機EL素子が好ましい。有機EL素子は、タンデム構造であることが好ましい。有機EL素子のタンデム構造については、特開2003-45676号公報、三上明義監修、「有機EL技術開発の最前線-高輝度・高精度・長寿命化・ノウハウ集-」、技術情報協会、326-328ページ、2008年などに記載されている。有機EL素子のタンデム構造としては、例えば、基板の一面において、光反射性を備えた下部電極と光透過性を備えた上部電極との間に有機EL層を設けた構造などが挙げられる。下部電極は、可視光の波長域において十分な反射率を有する材料により構成されていることが好ましい。有機EL層は、複数の発光層を含み、それら複数の発光層が積層された積層構造(タンデム構造)を有していることが好ましい。有機EL層は、例えば、複数の発光層には、赤色発光層、緑色発光層及び青色発光層を含むことができる。そして、複数の発光層とともに、それらは発光層を発光させるための複数の発光補助層を併せて有することが好ましい。有機EL層は、例えば、発光層と発光補助層とが交互に積層する積層構造とすることができる。こうした構造の有機EL層を有する有機EL素子は、白色光を発光することができる。その場合、有機EL素子が発光する白色光のスペクトルは、青色領域(430nm-485nm)、緑色領域(530nm-580nm)及び黄色領域(580nm-620nm)に強い極大発光ピークを有するものが好ましい。これらの発光ピークに加え更に赤色領域(650nm-700nm)に極大発光ピークを有するものがより好ましい。白色光を発光する有機EL素子(白色有機EL素子)と、本発明のカラーフィルタとを組み合わせることにより、色再現性上優れた分光特性が得られ、より鮮明な映像や画像を表示可能である。 Moreover, the color filter of the present invention can be preferably used for an organic EL device. As the organic EL element, a white organic EL element is preferable. The organic EL element preferably has a tandem structure. Regarding the tandem structure of organic EL elements, JP 2003-45676 A, supervised by Akiyoshi Mikami, “Frontier of Organic EL Technology Development-High Brightness, High Precision, Long Life, Know-how Collection”, Technical Information Association, 326-328 pages, 2008, etc. Examples of the tandem structure of the organic EL element include a structure in which an organic EL layer is provided between a lower electrode having light reflectivity and an upper electrode having light transmittance on one surface of a substrate. The lower electrode is preferably made of a material having a sufficient reflectance in the visible light wavelength region. The organic EL layer preferably includes a plurality of light emitting layers and has a stacked structure (tandem structure) in which the plurality of light emitting layers are stacked. For example, the organic EL layer may include a red light emitting layer, a green light emitting layer, and a blue light emitting layer in the plurality of light emitting layers. And it is preferable that they have a some light emission auxiliary layer for light-emitting a light emitting layer together with a some light emitting layer. The organic EL layer can have, for example, a stacked structure in which light emitting layers and light emitting auxiliary layers are alternately stacked. An organic EL element having an organic EL layer having such a structure can emit white light. In that case, the spectrum of white light emitted from the organic EL element preferably has a strong maximum emission peak in the blue region (430 nm to 485 nm), the green region (530 nm to 580 nm), and the yellow region (580 nm to 620 nm). In addition to these emission peaks, those having a maximum emission peak in the red region (650 nm to 700 nm) are more preferable. By combining an organic EL element that emits white light (white organic EL element) and the color filter of the present invention, spectral characteristics excellent in color reproducibility can be obtained, and clearer images and images can be displayed. .
 本発明のカラーフィルタにおける着色パターン(着色画素)の膜厚は、2.0μm以下が好ましく、1.0μm以下がより好ましく、0.7μm以下がさらに好ましい。下限は、例えば0.1μm以上とすることができ、0.2μm以上とすることもできる。
 また、着色パターン(着色画素)のサイズ(パターン幅)としては、2.5μm以下が好ましく、2.0μm以下がより好ましく、1.7μm以下が特に好ましい。下限は、例えば0.1μm以上とすることができ、0.2μm以上とすることもできる。
The film thickness of the colored pattern (colored pixel) in the color filter of the present invention is preferably 2.0 μm or less, more preferably 1.0 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.7 μm or less. The lower limit can be, for example, 0.1 μm or more, and can also be 0.2 μm or more.
Further, the size (pattern width) of the colored pattern (colored pixel) is preferably 2.5 μm or less, more preferably 2.0 μm or less, and particularly preferably 1.7 μm or less. The lower limit can be, for example, 0.1 μm or more, and can also be 0.2 μm or more.
<固体撮像素子>
 本発明の固体撮像素子は、上述した本発明のカラーフィルタを備える。本発明の固体撮像素子の構成としては、本発明のカラーフィルタを備え、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はないが、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。
<Solid-state imaging device>
The solid-state imaging device of the present invention includes the above-described color filter of the present invention. The configuration of the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration that includes the color filter of the present invention and functions as a solid-state imaging device.
 支持体上に、固体撮像素子(CCDイメージセンサー、CMOSイメージセンサー等)の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオードおよびポリシリコン等からなる転送電極を有し、フォトダイオードおよび転送電極上にフォトダイオードの受光部のみ開口したタングステン等からなる遮光膜を有し、遮光膜上に遮光膜全面およびフォトダイオード受光部を覆うように形成された窒化シリコン等からなるデバイス保護膜を有し、デバイス保護膜上に、本発明の固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタを有する構成である。
 さらに、デバイス保護層上であってカラーフィルタの下(支持体に近い側)に集光手段(例えば、マイクロレンズ等。以下同じ)を有する構成や、カラーフィルタ上に集光手段を有する構成等であってもよい。
The support has a transfer electrode made of a plurality of photodiodes and polysilicon constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.). It has a light-shielding film made of tungsten or the like that is open only in the light-receiving part, and has a device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light-shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light-shielding film and the photodiode light-receiving part. In addition, the solid-state image sensor color filter of the present invention is included.
Further, a configuration having a light condensing means (for example, a microlens, etc., the same applies hereinafter) on the device protection layer and under the color filter (on the side close to the support), a structure having the light condensing means on the color filter It may be.
<画像表示装置>
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、液晶表示装置や有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置などの、画像表示装置に用いることができる。
<Image display device>
The color filter of the present invention can be used in an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic electroluminescence display device.
 表示装置の定義や各表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木 昭夫著、(株)工業調査会 1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹 順章著、産業図書(株)平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田 龍男編集、(株)工業調査会 1994年発行)」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。 For the definition of display devices and details of each display device, refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Kenkyukai, 1990)”, “Display Device (Junsho Ibuki, Industrial Books Co., Ltd.) Issued in the first year). The liquid crystal display device is described, for example, in “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”. The liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、カラーTFT(Thin Film Transistor)方式の液晶表示装置に用いてもよい。カラーTFT方式の液晶表示装置については、例えば「カラーTFT液晶ディスプレイ(共立出版(株)1996年発行)」に記載されている。さらに、本発明はIPS(In Plane Switching)などの横電界駆動方式、MVA(Multi-domain Vertical Alignment)などの画素分割方式などの視野角が拡大された液晶表示装置や、STN(Super-Twist Nematic)、TN(Twisted Nematic)、VA(Vertical Alignment)、OCS(on-chip spacer)、FFS(fringe field switching)、および、R-OCB(Reflective Optically Compensated Bend)等にも適用できる。
 また、本発明におけるカラーフィルタは、明るく高精細なCOA(Color-filter On Array)方式にも供することが可能である。COA方式の液晶表示装置にあっては、カラーフィルタ層に対する要求特性は、前述のような通常の要求特性に加えて、層間絶縁膜に対する要求特性、すなわち低誘電率および剥離液耐性が必要とされることがある。本発明のカラーフィルタは、耐光性などに優れるので、解像度が高く長期耐久性に優れたCOA方式の液晶表示装置を提供することができる。なお、低誘電率の要求特性を満足するためには、カラーフィルタ層の上に樹脂被膜を設けてもよい。
 これらの画像表示方式については、例えば、「EL、PDP、LCDディスプレイ-技術と市場の最新動向-(東レリサーチセンター調査研究部門 2001年発行)」の43ページなどに記載されている。
The color filter of the present invention may be used in a color TFT (Thin Film Transistor) type liquid crystal display device. The color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”. Further, the present invention relates to a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a horizontal electric field driving method such as IPS (In Plane Switching), a pixel division method such as MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignment), a STN (Super-Twist Nematic). ), TN (Twisted Nematic), VA (Vertical Alignment), OCS (On-chip spacer), FFS (Fringe field switching), and R-OCB (Reflective Optical Compensated).
In addition, the color filter in the present invention can be used for a bright and high-definition COA (Color-filter On Array) system. In the case of a COA type liquid crystal display device, the required characteristics for the color filter layer require the required characteristics for the interlayer insulating film, that is, the low dielectric constant and the resistance to the stripping solution, in addition to the normal required characteristics as described above. Sometimes. Since the color filter of the present invention is excellent in light resistance and the like, a COA type liquid crystal display device having high resolution and excellent long-term durability can be provided. In order to satisfy the required characteristics of a low dielectric constant, a resin film may be provided on the color filter layer.
These image display methods are described, for example, on page 43 of "EL, PDP, LCD display-latest technology and market trends (issued in 2001 by Toray Research Center Research Division)".
 本発明におけるカラーフィルタを備えた液晶表示装置は、本発明におけるカラーフィルタ以外に、電極基板、偏光フィルム、位相差フィルム、バックライト、スペーサ、視野角保障フィルムなど様々な部材から構成される。本発明のカラーフィルタは、これらの公知の部材で構成される液晶表示装置に適用することができる。これらの部材については、例えば、「'94液晶ディスプレイ周辺材料・ケミカルズの市場(島 健太郎 (株)シーエムシー 1994年発行)」、「2003液晶関連市場の現状と将来展望(下巻)(表良吉(株)富士キメラ総研、2003年発行)」に記載されている。
 バックライトに関しては、SID meeting Digest 1380(2005)(A.Konno et.al)や、月刊ディスプレイ 2005年12月号の18~24ページ(島 康裕)、同25~30ページ(八木隆明)などに記載されている。
In addition to the color filter of the present invention, the liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter of the present invention includes various members such as an electrode substrate, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a backlight, a spacer, and a viewing angle guarantee film. The color filter of the present invention can be applied to a liquid crystal display device composed of these known members. Regarding these components, for example, “'94 Liquid Crystal Display Peripheral Materials / Chemicals Market (Kentaro Shima CMC 1994)”, “2003 Liquid Crystal Related Markets Current Status and Future Prospects (Volume 2)” Fuji Chimera Research Institute, Ltd., published in 2003) ”.
Regarding backlighting, SID meeting Digest 1380 (2005) (A. Konno et.al), Monthly Display December 2005, pages 18-24 (Yasuhiro Shima), pages 25-30 (Takaaki Yagi), etc. Are listed.
 本発明におけるカラーフィルタを液晶表示装置に用いると、従来公知の冷陰極管の三波長管と組み合わせたときに高いコントラストを実現できるが、さらに、赤、緑、青のダイオード光源(RGB-LED)をバックライトとすることによって輝度が高く、また、色純度の高い色再現性の良好な液晶表示装置を提供することができる。 When the color filter according to the present invention is used in a liquid crystal display device, a high contrast can be realized when combined with a conventionally known three-wavelength tube of a cold cathode tube, and further, red, green and blue diode light sources (RGB-LED). By using as a backlight, a liquid crystal display device having high luminance and high color purity and good color reproducibility can be provided.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明をさらに具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」、「%」は、質量基準である。 The present invention will be described more specifically with reference to the following examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. Unless otherwise specified, “part” and “%” are based on mass.
<重量平均分子量の測定>
 重量平均分子量は、以下の方法で測定した。
カラムの種類:TOSOH TSKgel Super HZM-Hと、TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ4000と、TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ2000とを連結したカラム
展開溶媒:テトラヒドロフラン
カラム温度:40℃
流量(サンプル注入量):1.0μL(サンプル濃度:0.1質量%)
装置名:東ソー製 HLC-8220GPC
検出器:RI(屈折率)検出器
検量線ベース樹脂:ポリスチレン
<Measurement of weight average molecular weight>
The weight average molecular weight was measured by the following method.
Column type: TOSOH TSKgel Super HZM-H, TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ4000, and TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ2000 linked column developing solvent: Tetrahydrofuran Column temperature: 40 ° C
Flow rate (sample injection amount): 1.0 μL (sample concentration: 0.1% by mass)
Device name: HLC-8220GPC manufactured by Tosoh Corporation
Detector: RI (refractive index) detector Calibration curve Base resin: Polystyrene
(C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6(PB15:6)顔料分散液の調製)
 顔料としてピグメントブルー15:6 15部と、樹脂(分散剤)としてDisperbyk-161(BYKChemie社製)50部と、溶剤としてプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA) 35部とからなる混合液を、ビーズミルにより15時間混合および分散して、PB15:6顔料分散液を調製した。
(Preparation of CI Pigment Blue 15: 6 (PB15: 6) Pigment Dispersion)
Pigment Blue 15: 6 15 parts as a pigment, Disperbyk-161 (manufactured by BYK Chemie) as a resin (dispersant) 50 parts, and a mixed liquid of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) 35 parts as a solvent by a bead mill PB15: 6 pigment dispersion was prepared by mixing and dispersing for 15 hours.
(C.I.ピグメントバイオレット23(PV23)顔料分散液の調製)
 ピグメントバイオレット23 15部と、樹脂(分散剤)としてDisperbyk-161(BYKChemie社製)50部と、溶剤としてプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA) 35部とからなる混合液を、ビーズミルにより15時間混合および分散して、PV23顔料分散液を調製した。
(Preparation of CI Pigment Violet 23 (PV23) Pigment Dispersion)
A mixture of 15 parts of Pigment Violet 23, 50 parts of Disperbyk-161 (manufactured by BYK Chemie) as a resin (dispersant), and 35 parts of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) as a solvent was mixed for 15 hours by a bead mill. Dispersed to prepare a PV23 pigment dispersion.
(着色組成物の調製)
 下記の各成分を混合して、着色組成物を得た。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000054

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000055
(Preparation of coloring composition)
The following components were mixed to obtain a colored composition.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000054

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000055
 上記表に示した成分記号は各々下記の化合物を表す。
(色素A)
A-1:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=12000、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056

A-2:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=13200、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057

A-3:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=13200、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058

A-4:下記構造(色素単量体)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059

A-5:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=10800、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060

A-6:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=9300、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061

A-7:下記構造(色素多量体(トリアリールメタン骨格/メタクリル酸/重合性基を有するユニットの質量比=43.15/13.2/25.93)、重量平均分子量=8200)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062

A-8:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=11300)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063

A-9:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=10100、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
The component symbols shown in the above table represent the following compounds, respectively.
(Dye A)
A-1: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 12000, the numerical value written in the repeating unit of the main chain is a mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056

A-2: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 13200, the numerical value written in the repeating unit of the main chain is a mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057

A-3: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 13200, the numerical value written in the repeating unit of the main chain is a mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058

A-4: The following structure (pigment monomer)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059

A-5: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 10800, the numerical value written in the repeating unit of the main chain is a mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060

A-6: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 9300, the numerical value written in the repeating unit of the main chain is mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061

A-7: The following structure (pigment multimer (mass ratio of units having triarylmethane skeleton / methacrylic acid / polymerizable group = 43.15 / 13.2 / 25.93), weight average molecular weight = 8200)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062

A-8: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 11300)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063

A-9: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 10100, the numerical value written in the repeating unit of the main chain is a mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
(色素B)
B-1:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=12000、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065

B-2:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=13200、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066

B-3:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=13200、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067

B-4:下記構造(色素多量体(キサンテン骨格/メタクリル酸/メタクリル酸とグリシジルメタクリレートの付加体のモル比=5/6/6であり、メタクリル酸由来の繰り返し単位と、メタクリル酸とグリシジルメタクリレートの付加体由来の繰り返し単位の平均個数が12個)、重量平均分子量=11600)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068

B-5:下記構造(色素単量体)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069

B-6:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=11000、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070

B-7:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=9100、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071

B-8:下記構造(色素多量体(キサンテン骨格/メタクリル酸/重合性基を有するユニットの質量比=46.42/12.44/24.44であり)、重量平均分子量=8900)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072

B-9:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=13500)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073

B-10:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=14100)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074

B-11:下記構造(色素多量体、重量平均分子量=8500、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000075
(Dye B)
B-1: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 12000, the numerical value written together with the repeating unit of the main chain is a mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065

B-2: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 13200, the numerical value written in the repeating unit of the main chain is a mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066

B-3: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 13200, and the numerical value written in the repeating unit of the main chain is a mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067

B-4: The following structure (pigment multimer (xanthene skeleton / methacrylic acid / methacrylic acid and glycidyl methacrylate adduct molar ratio = 5/6/6), repeating unit derived from methacrylic acid, methacrylic acid and glycidyl methacrylate The average number of repeating units derived from the adduct is 12), weight average molecular weight = 11600)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068

B-5: The following structure (pigment monomer)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069

B-6: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 11000, the numerical value written in the repeating unit of the main chain is a mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070

B-7: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 9100, the numerical value written in the repeating unit of the main chain is a mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071

B-8: The following structure (pigment multimer (xanthene skeleton / methacrylic acid / unit ratio having a polymerizable group = 46.42 / 12.44 / 24.44), weight average molecular weight = 8900)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072

B-9: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 13500)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073

B-10: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 14100)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074

B-11: The following structure (pigment multimer, weight average molecular weight = 8500, the numerical value written in the repeating unit of the main chain is a mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000075
(他の色素多量体)
 C-1:下記構造(重量平均分子量=13200、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000076
(Other pigment multimers)
C-1: The following structure (weight average molecular weight = 13200, the numerical value written in the repeating unit of the main chain is a mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000076
(樹脂)
D-1:アクリキュア-RD-F8(日本触媒(株)製、重量平均分子量=11000)
D-2:アクリベースFF-426(藤倉化成(株)製、重量平均分子量=14000)
D-3:下記構造(重量平均分子量=11000、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000077

D-4:下記構造(重量平均分子量=12000、主鎖の繰り返し単位に併記される数値は質量比である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000078

(硬化性化合物)
E-1:KARAYAD DPHA (日本化薬(株)製、モノマー、分子量=562)
E-2:アロニックスTO-2349(東亞合成(株)製、モノマー、分子量=625)
E-3:NKエステルA-DPH-12E(新中村化学(株)製、モノマー、分子量=1107)
E-4:NKエステルA-TMMT(新中村化学(株)製、モノマー、分子量=352)(光重合開始剤)
F-1:IRGACURE-OXE01(BASF社製)
F-2:IRGACURE-OXE02(BASF社製)
F-3:IRGACURE-369(BASF社製)
F-4:下記化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000079

(界面活性剤)
W-1:下記混合物(Mw=14000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000080

W-2:PolyFox(登録商標) PF-6320 (OMNOVA社製)
(溶剤)
PGMEA:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート
(resin)
D-1: ACRYCURE-RD-F8 (manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd., weight average molecular weight = 11000)
D-2: Acrybase FF-426 (manufactured by Fujikura Kasei Co., Ltd., weight average molecular weight = 14000)
D-3: The following structure (weight average molecular weight = 11000, the numerical value written in the repeating unit of the main chain is a mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000077

D-4: The following structure (weight average molecular weight = 12000, the numerical value written in the repeating unit of the main chain is a mass ratio)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000078

(Curable compound)
E-1: KARAYAD DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., monomer, molecular weight = 562)
E-2: Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., monomer, molecular weight = 625)
E-3: NK ester A-DPH-12E (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., monomer, molecular weight = 1107)
E-4: NK ester A-TMMT (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., monomer, molecular weight = 352) (photopolymerization initiator)
F-1: IRGACURE-OXE01 (BASF)
F-2: IRGACURE-OXE02 (BASF)
F-3: IRGACURE-369 (BASF)
F-4: The following compound
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000079

(Surfactant)
W-1: the following mixture (Mw = 14000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000080

W-2: PolyFox (registered trademark) PF-6320 (manufactured by OMNOVA)
(solvent)
PGMEA: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
(分光特性評価)
 ガラス基板上に各着色組成物を乾燥膜厚が2μmとなるようにスピン塗布した。
 そして、この塗布膜を、90℃で120秒間加熱処理(プリベーク)を行なった。
 次いで、i線ステッパー露光装置FPA-3000i5+(Canon(株)製)を使用して365nmの波長でパターンが1.0μm四方のIslandパターンマスクを通して200mJ/cm2の露光量で露光した。
 次いで、露光後の塗膜を、100℃で300秒間加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行なった。
 以上により、カラーフィルタを製造した。
 得られたカラーフィルタの透過分光特性を、分光光度計MCPD-3000(大塚電子(株)社製)で測定した。
<評価基準>
5:波長500nmの透過率が40%未満で、波長550~650nmの平均透過率が3%未満であり、かつ、波長400~460nmの最大透過率が85%以上である。
4:波長500nmの透過率が40%未満で、波長550~650nmの平均透過率が3%未満であり、かつ、波長400~460nmの最大透過率が80%以上85%未満である。
3:波長500nmの透過率が40%未満で、波長550~650nmの平均透過率が3%未満であり、かつ、波長400~460nmの最大透過率が75%以上80%未満である。
2:波長500nmの透過率が40%未満で、波長550~650nmの平均透過率が3%未満であり、かつ、波長400~460nmの最大透過率が70%以上75%未満である。
1:波長500nmの透過率が40%未満で、波長550~650nmの平均透過率が3%未満であり、かつ、波長400~460nmの最大透過率が70%未満である。
0:波長500nmの透過率が40%以上であるか、あるいは、波長550~650nmの平均透過率が3%以上である。
(Spectral characteristic evaluation)
Each colored composition was spin-coated on a glass substrate so that the dry film thickness was 2 μm.
Then, this coating film was subjected to heat treatment (pre-baking) at 90 ° C. for 120 seconds.
Next, using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.), exposure was performed at an exposure amount of 200 mJ / cm 2 through an Island pattern mask having a pattern of 1.0 μm square at a wavelength of 365 nm.
Next, the exposed coating film was subjected to heat treatment (post-baking) at 100 ° C. for 300 seconds.
The color filter was manufactured by the above.
The transmission spectral characteristics of the obtained color filter were measured with a spectrophotometer MCPD-3000 (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.).
<Evaluation criteria>
5: The transmittance at a wavelength of 500 nm is less than 40%, the average transmittance at a wavelength of 550 to 650 nm is less than 3%, and the maximum transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 460 nm is 85% or more.
4: The transmittance at a wavelength of 500 nm is less than 40%, the average transmittance at a wavelength of 550 to 650 nm is less than 3%, and the maximum transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 460 nm is 80% or more and less than 85%.
3: The transmittance at a wavelength of 500 nm is less than 40%, the average transmittance at a wavelength of 550 to 650 nm is less than 3%, and the maximum transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 460 nm is 75% or more and less than 80%.
2: The transmittance at a wavelength of 500 nm is less than 40%, the average transmittance at a wavelength of 550 to 650 nm is less than 3%, and the maximum transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 460 nm is 70% or more and less than 75%.
1: The transmittance at a wavelength of 500 nm is less than 40%, the average transmittance at a wavelength of 550 to 650 nm is less than 3%, and the maximum transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 460 nm is less than 70%.
0: The transmittance at a wavelength of 500 nm is 40% or more, or the average transmittance at a wavelength of 550 to 650 nm is 3% or more.
(耐溶剤性評価)
 分光特性評価と同様の方法でカラーフィルタを製造した。得られたカラーフィルタを、PGMEAに10分浸漬した後、膜厚を測定し残膜率を算出した。
 残膜率=(PGMEAに10分間浸漬後のカラーフィルタの膜厚/PGMEAに浸漬前のカラーフィルタの膜厚)×100
<評価基準>
5:残膜率が100%である。
4:残膜率が98%以上である。
3:残膜率が95%以上98%未満である。
2:残膜率が90%以上95%未満である。
1:残膜率が80%以上90%未満である。
0:残膜率が80%未満である。
(Solvent resistance evaluation)
A color filter was produced by the same method as the spectral characteristic evaluation. After the obtained color filter was immersed in PGMEA for 10 minutes, the film thickness was measured and the remaining film ratio was calculated.
Residual film ratio = (film thickness of color filter after being immersed in PGMEA for 10 minutes / film thickness of color filter before being immersed in PGMEA) × 100
<Evaluation criteria>
5: The remaining film rate is 100%.
4: The remaining film ratio is 98% or more.
3: The remaining film ratio is 95% or more and less than 98%.
2: The remaining film ratio is 90% or more and less than 95%.
1: The remaining film rate is 80% or more and less than 90%.
0: Remaining film ratio is less than 80%.
(混色評価)
 分光特性評価と同様の方法でカラーフィルタを製造した。得られたカラーフィルタの400~700nmの波長範囲における最大透過率T0を、MCPD-3000(大塚電子(株)製)を使用して測定した。
 次に、得られたカラーフィルタ上に、以下に示す混色評価用赤色着色組成物を、乾燥後の膜厚が2μmになるようにスピン塗布し、100℃で120秒間加熱処理(プリベーク)を行った。次いで、i線ステッパー露光装置による露光を行わずに、水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム(TMAH)0.3質量%水溶液を用い、23℃で60秒間シャワー現像を行った。その後、純水を用いたスピンシャワーにてリンスを行い、混色評価用赤色着色組成物を現像除去した。
 混色評価用赤色着色組成物を現像除去後のカラーフィルタの、400~700nmの波長範囲における最大透過率T1を、MCPD-3000(大塚電子(株)製)を使用して測定した。
 最大透過率変化(ΔT=T0-T1)を算出し、以下の基準に基づいて判定した。ΔTが小さいほど混色が少なく、より望ましい。
<評価基準>
5:最大透過率変化が0%である。
4:最大透過率変化が0%より大きく1%未満である。
3:最大透過率変化が1%以上3%未満である。
2:最大透過率変化が3%以上5%未満である。
1:最大透過率変化が5%以上10%未満である。
0:最大透過率変化が10%以上である。
<混色評価用赤色着色組成物>
 C.I.ピグメントレッド254 9.9部、
C.I.ピグメントイエロー139 4.4部、
顔料誘導体A 1.4部、
分散剤Aを30質量%含有するPGMEA溶液 15.6部、および
溶剤としてPGMEA 41.5部
とからなる混合液を、ビーズミルにより15時間混合・分散して、Red顔料分散液を調製した。
 次いで、
上記Red顔料分散液 37.7部、
上記樹脂D-1 5.6部、
上記硬化性化合物E-17部、
光重合開始剤F-1 3.92部、
上記界面活性剤W-1 0.28部、および
溶剤としてPGMEA 51.47部
を均一に混合し、混色評価用赤色着色組成物を調製した。
・顔料誘導体A:以下に示す構造
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000081

・分散剤A:以下に示す構造
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000082
(Color mixing evaluation)
A color filter was produced by the same method as the spectral characteristic evaluation. The maximum transmittance T0 in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm of the obtained color filter was measured using MCPD-3000 (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.).
Next, the following red coloring composition for color mixture evaluation is spin-coated on the obtained color filter so that the film thickness after drying becomes 2 μm, and heat treatment (prebaking) is performed at 100 ° C. for 120 seconds. It was. Next, shower development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) without performing exposure with an i-line stepper exposure apparatus. Thereafter, rinsing was performed in a spin shower using pure water, and the red coloring composition for color mixture evaluation was developed and removed.
The maximum transmittance T1 in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm of the color filter after the development and removal of the red coloring composition for color mixture evaluation was measured using MCPD-3000 (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.).
The maximum transmittance change (ΔT = T0−T1) was calculated and judged based on the following criteria. The smaller ΔT, the less color mixing, and more desirable.
<Evaluation criteria>
5: Maximum transmittance change is 0%.
4: Maximum transmittance change is greater than 0% and less than 1%.
3: The maximum transmittance change is 1% or more and less than 3%.
2: The maximum transmittance change is 3% or more and less than 5%.
1: The maximum transmittance change is 5% or more and less than 10%.
0: Maximum transmittance change is 10% or more.
<Red coloring composition for color mixture evaluation>
C. I. 9.9 parts of Pigment Red 254,
C. I. Pigment Yellow 139 4.4 parts,
1.4 parts of pigment derivative A,
A mixed solution composed of 15.6 parts of PGMEA solution containing 30% by mass of Dispersant A and 41.5 parts of PGMEA as a solvent was mixed and dispersed by a bead mill for 15 hours to prepare a Red pigment dispersion.
Then
37.7 parts of the above Red pigment dispersion,
5.6 parts of the above resin D-1;
17 parts of the curable compound E-17,
Photopolymerization initiator F-1 3.92 parts,
0.28 parts of the above surfactant W-1 and 51.47 parts of PGMEA as a solvent were uniformly mixed to prepare a red coloring composition for color mixing evaluation.
Pigment derivative A: structure shown below
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000081

Dispersant A: Structure shown below
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000082
(信頼性評価)高温高湿試験
 分光評価と同様の方法でカラーフィルタを製造した。得られたカラーフィルタを、温度85℃、湿度85%条件下で3日間放置し、膜面を目視及び光学顕微鏡で観察した。
<評価基準>
6:図1(a)に示すように、膜面に分離成分は確認されない
5:図1(b)に示すような微小な分離成分が膜面に1、2個見られる
4:図1(b)に示すような微小な分離成分が膜面に数個見られる
3:図1(b)に示すような微小な分離成分が膜面に数十個見られる
2:図1(c)に示すように、分離成分が膜面に粒状に現われる
1:図1(d)に示すように、分離成分が膜面に斑点状に現われる
0:相分離が起こり膜が二層に分離した
 なお、上記において、図1(a)とは図1の左上枠を示し、図1(b)とは図1の右上枠を示し、図1(c)とは図1の左下枠を示し、図1(d)とは図1の右下枠を示す。
(Reliability evaluation) High temperature and high humidity test A color filter was produced in the same manner as in the spectral evaluation. The obtained color filter was allowed to stand for 3 days under conditions of a temperature of 85 ° C. and a humidity of 85%, and the film surface was observed visually and with an optical microscope.
<Evaluation criteria>
6: As shown in FIG. 1A, no separation component is confirmed on the membrane surface. 5: One or two minute separation components as shown in FIG. 1B are seen on the membrane surface. 4: FIG. b) Several minute separation components as seen on the membrane surface can be seen 3: Dozens of minute separation components as seen in FIG. 1 (b) can be seen on the membrane surface 2: FIG. 1 (c) As shown, the separation component appears granular on the membrane surface 1: As shown in FIG. 1 (d), the separation component appears as spots on the membrane surface 0: Phase separation occurred and the membrane separated into two layers. 1 (a) shows the upper left frame of FIG. 1, FIG. 1 (b) shows the upper right frame of FIG. 1, FIG. 1 (c) shows the lower left frame of FIG. (D) shows the lower right frame of FIG.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000083
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000083

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000084
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000084
 上記表に示すように、実施例の着色組成物は、分光特性が良好で、かつ、耐溶剤性に優れたカラーフィルタを製造することができた。また、実施例のカラーフィルタは、他色との混色が小さいものであった。更には、高温高湿試験において、膜成分の分離が小さく、膜の信頼性にも優れていた。
 一方、比較例は、分光と耐溶剤性との両立することができなかった。
As shown in the above table, the colored composition of the example was able to produce a color filter having good spectral characteristics and excellent solvent resistance. Further, the color filter of the example had a small color mixture with other colors. Furthermore, in the high-temperature and high-humidity test, separation of membrane components was small, and the reliability of the membrane was excellent.
On the other hand, the comparative example was unable to achieve both spectroscopic and solvent resistance.

Claims (13)

  1.  トリアリールメタン骨格を有する色素Aと、キサンテン骨格を有する色素Bと、硬化性化合物とを含み、
     前記色素Aおよび前記色素Bから選ばれる少なくとも一種が、色素多量体である、着色組成物。
    A dye A having a triarylmethane skeleton, a dye B having a xanthene skeleton, and a curable compound;
    A coloring composition, wherein at least one selected from the dye A and the dye B is a dye multimer.
  2.  前記色素Aおよび前記色素Bが色素多量体である、請求項1に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to claim 1, wherein the dye A and the dye B are dye multimers.
  3.  前記色素Aのトリアリールメタン骨格のモル数と、前記色素Bのキサンテン骨格のモル数との比が、40:60~75:25である、請求項1に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to claim 1, wherein the ratio of the number of moles of the triarylmethane skeleton of the dye A to the number of moles of the xanthene skeleton of the dye B is 40:60 to 75:25.
  4.  前記色素Aおよび前記色素Bから選ばれる少なくとも一種が、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオン、トリス(スルホニル)メチドアニオンおよびテトラアリールボレートアニオンから選択される少なくとも一種のアニオンを有する、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The at least one selected from the dye A and the dye B has at least one anion selected from a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methide anion, and a tetraarylborate anion. 2. A coloring composition according to item 1.
  5.  前記色素Aは、トリアリールメタン骨格を有するカチオン部と、前記カチオン部と共有結合を介して結合したアニオンとを有する、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the dye A has a cation part having a triarylmethane skeleton and an anion bonded to the cation part through a covalent bond.
  6.  前記色素Bは、キサンテン骨格を有するカチオン部と、前記カチオン部と共有結合を介して結合したアニオンとを有する、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the dye B has a cation moiety having a xanthene skeleton and an anion bonded to the cation moiety through a covalent bond.
  7.  前記色素Aおよび前記色素Bから選ばれる少なくとも一種が、重合性不飽和二重結合を含む基を有する、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein at least one selected from the dye A and the dye B has a group containing a polymerizable unsaturated double bond.
  8.  請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物を用いたカラーフィルタ。 A color filter using the colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7.
  9.  有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子用である、請求項8に記載のカラーフィルタ。 The color filter according to claim 8, which is used for an organic electroluminescence element.
  10.  請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する工程と、
     前記着色成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、
     未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成する工程と、
     前記着色パターンを50~120℃で加熱する工程と、
     を含むパターン形成方法。
    Forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
    Exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern;
    A step of developing and removing an unexposed portion to form a colored pattern;
    Heating the colored pattern at 50 to 120 ° C .;
    A pattern forming method including:
  11.  請求項10に記載のパターン形成方法を含む、カラーフィルタの製造方法。 A method for producing a color filter, comprising the pattern forming method according to claim 10.
  12.  請求項8に記載のカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子。 A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to claim 8.
  13.  請求項8に記載のカラーフィルタを有する画像表示装置。 An image display device having the color filter according to claim 8.
PCT/JP2015/081961 2015-01-29 2015-11-13 Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imagine element and image display device WO2016121194A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016571779A JP6543275B2 (en) 2015-01-29 2015-11-13 Colored composition, color filter, pattern forming method, method of manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
KR1020177013445A KR102018516B1 (en) 2015-01-29 2015-11-13 Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imagine element and image display device

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2015-015889 2015-01-29
JP2015015889 2015-01-29
JP2015150236 2015-07-30
JP2015-150236 2015-07-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016121194A1 true WO2016121194A1 (en) 2016-08-04

Family

ID=56542832

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2015/081961 WO2016121194A1 (en) 2015-01-29 2015-11-13 Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imagine element and image display device

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6543275B2 (en)
KR (1) KR102018516B1 (en)
TW (1) TWI712655B (en)
WO (1) WO2016121194A1 (en)

Cited By (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017026473A1 (en) * 2015-08-13 2017-02-16 富士フイルム株式会社 Color composition, cured film, color filter, process for producing color filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and polymer
WO2017038587A1 (en) * 2015-08-31 2017-03-09 富士フイルム株式会社 Curable composition, method for manufacturing cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP2018058976A (en) * 2016-10-04 2018-04-12 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Coloring resin composition, color filter, and image display device
US10240042B2 (en) 2016-08-31 2019-03-26 StoreDot Ltd. Photoluminescent compounds and uses thereof
JP2019163370A (en) * 2018-03-19 2019-09-26 東友ファインケム株式会社Dongwoo Fine−Chem Co., Ltd. Colored curable resin composition
US10465110B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-11-05 StoreDot Ltd. Rhodamine based salts
US10472520B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-11-12 StoreDot Ltd. Red enhancement in white LED displays using UV-cured color conversion films
US10473979B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-11-12 StoreDot Ltd. Color conversion films produced by UV curing processes
US10473968B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-11-12 StoreDot Ltd. Protective layers produced by sol gel processes
US10495917B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-12-03 StoreDot Ltd. Protective layers produced by UV curing processes
US10519314B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-12-31 StoreDot Ltd. Red-enhanced white LCD displays comprising sol-gel-based color conversion films
US10533091B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2020-01-14 StoreDot Ltd. Color conversion with solid matrix films
WO2020066919A1 (en) * 2018-09-26 2020-04-02 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored composition, method for forming cured film, method for manufacturing color filter, and method for manufacturing display device
US10875950B2 (en) 2015-08-13 2020-12-29 Fujifilm Corporation Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and polymer
US11275265B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2022-03-15 Moleculed Ltd. Control of illumination spectra for LCD displays

Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013144724A (en) * 2012-01-13 2013-07-25 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Colored curable resin composition
JP2014016593A (en) * 2012-06-11 2014-01-30 Toyo Ink Sc Holdings Co Ltd Coloring composition for color filter, and color filter
WO2014123124A1 (en) * 2013-02-08 2014-08-14 大日本印刷株式会社 Colorant dispersion liquid, manufacturing method for colorant dispersion liquid, colored resin composition for color filter, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and organic light-emitting display device
JP2014214274A (en) * 2013-04-26 2014-11-17 大日本印刷株式会社 Color material dispersion liquid, coloring resin composition for color filter, color filter, liquid crystal display, and organic light-emitting display
WO2015002216A1 (en) * 2013-07-05 2015-01-08 富士フイルム株式会社 Pigment multimer, coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2015005265A1 (en) * 2013-07-09 2015-01-15 富士フイルム株式会社 Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2015046285A1 (en) * 2013-09-30 2015-04-02 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
JP2015092221A (en) * 2013-06-17 2015-05-14 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Color filter coloring composition and color filter
JP2015145439A (en) * 2014-01-31 2015-08-13 富士フイルム株式会社 Coloring composition, and cured film, color filter, pattern forming method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device using the same
JP2015178604A (en) * 2014-02-27 2015-10-08 Jsr株式会社 Coloring composition, colored cured film and display element
JP2015178603A (en) * 2014-02-27 2015-10-08 Jsr株式会社 Coloring composition, colored cured film and display element

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP5715380B2 (en) 2010-06-30 2015-05-07 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored curable composition, color filter, production method thereof, solid-state imaging device, liquid crystal display device, and dye multimer
JP2012251104A (en) * 2011-06-06 2012-12-20 Dic Corp Pigment composition and color filter
KR101466147B1 (en) 2011-12-05 2014-11-27 제일모직 주식회사 Photosensitive resin composition for color filter and color filter using the same
JP6089748B2 (en) * 2013-02-13 2017-03-08 Jsr株式会社 Colored composition, colored cured film, and display element

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013144724A (en) * 2012-01-13 2013-07-25 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Colored curable resin composition
JP2014016593A (en) * 2012-06-11 2014-01-30 Toyo Ink Sc Holdings Co Ltd Coloring composition for color filter, and color filter
WO2014123124A1 (en) * 2013-02-08 2014-08-14 大日本印刷株式会社 Colorant dispersion liquid, manufacturing method for colorant dispersion liquid, colored resin composition for color filter, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and organic light-emitting display device
JP2014214274A (en) * 2013-04-26 2014-11-17 大日本印刷株式会社 Color material dispersion liquid, coloring resin composition for color filter, color filter, liquid crystal display, and organic light-emitting display
JP2015092221A (en) * 2013-06-17 2015-05-14 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Color filter coloring composition and color filter
WO2015002216A1 (en) * 2013-07-05 2015-01-08 富士フイルム株式会社 Pigment multimer, coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2015005265A1 (en) * 2013-07-09 2015-01-15 富士フイルム株式会社 Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2015046285A1 (en) * 2013-09-30 2015-04-02 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
JP2015145439A (en) * 2014-01-31 2015-08-13 富士フイルム株式会社 Coloring composition, and cured film, color filter, pattern forming method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device using the same
JP2015178604A (en) * 2014-02-27 2015-10-08 Jsr株式会社 Coloring composition, colored cured film and display element
JP2015178603A (en) * 2014-02-27 2015-10-08 Jsr株式会社 Coloring composition, colored cured film and display element

Cited By (23)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017026473A1 (en) * 2015-08-13 2017-02-16 富士フイルム株式会社 Color composition, cured film, color filter, process for producing color filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and polymer
US10875950B2 (en) 2015-08-13 2020-12-29 Fujifilm Corporation Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and polymer
WO2017038587A1 (en) * 2015-08-31 2017-03-09 富士フイルム株式会社 Curable composition, method for manufacturing cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
US10795260B2 (en) 2015-08-31 2020-10-06 Fujifilm Corporation Curable composition, method for producing cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
US10465110B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-11-05 StoreDot Ltd. Rhodamine based salts
US10808127B2 (en) * 2015-11-16 2020-10-20 Moleculed Ltd. Color conversion with solid matrix films and green rhodamines
US10472520B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-11-12 StoreDot Ltd. Red enhancement in white LED displays using UV-cured color conversion films
US10473979B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-11-12 StoreDot Ltd. Color conversion films produced by UV curing processes
US10473968B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-11-12 StoreDot Ltd. Protective layers produced by sol gel processes
US10495917B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-12-03 StoreDot Ltd. Protective layers produced by UV curing processes
US10519314B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-12-31 StoreDot Ltd. Red-enhanced white LCD displays comprising sol-gel-based color conversion films
US10533091B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2020-01-14 StoreDot Ltd. Color conversion with solid matrix films
US11275265B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2022-03-15 Moleculed Ltd. Control of illumination spectra for LCD displays
US10240042B2 (en) 2016-08-31 2019-03-26 StoreDot Ltd. Photoluminescent compounds and uses thereof
JP2018058976A (en) * 2016-10-04 2018-04-12 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Coloring resin composition, color filter, and image display device
JP6996078B2 (en) 2016-10-04 2022-01-17 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Colored resin composition, color filter and image display device
JP2019163370A (en) * 2018-03-19 2019-09-26 東友ファインケム株式会社Dongwoo Fine−Chem Co., Ltd. Colored curable resin composition
JP7063663B2 (en) 2018-03-19 2022-05-09 東友ファインケム株式会社 Color curable resin composition, color filter and display device
CN112739726A (en) * 2018-09-26 2021-04-30 富士胶片株式会社 Coloring composition, method for forming cured film, method for manufacturing color filter, and method for manufacturing display device
JPWO2020066919A1 (en) * 2018-09-26 2021-09-24 富士フイルム株式会社 Coloring composition, curing film forming method, color filter manufacturing method and display device manufacturing method
WO2020066919A1 (en) * 2018-09-26 2020-04-02 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored composition, method for forming cured film, method for manufacturing color filter, and method for manufacturing display device
JP7169362B2 (en) 2018-09-26 2022-11-10 富士フイルム株式会社 Coloring composition, method for forming cured film, method for producing color filter, and method for producing display device
CN112739726B (en) * 2018-09-26 2023-09-19 富士胶片株式会社 Coloring composition, method for forming cured film, method for manufacturing color filter, and method for manufacturing display device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR102018516B1 (en) 2019-09-05
KR20170071574A (en) 2017-06-23
TW201627415A (en) 2016-08-01
JPWO2016121194A1 (en) 2017-12-14
TWI712655B (en) 2020-12-11
JP6543275B2 (en) 2019-07-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6711866B2 (en) Colored photosensitive composition, cured film, pattern forming method, infrared light cut filter with light-shielding film, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and infrared sensor
WO2016121194A1 (en) Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imagine element and image display device
JP6162165B2 (en) Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, organic electroluminescence device, pigment and method for producing pigment
KR101891094B1 (en) Coloring composition, and cured film, color filter, pattern-forming method, method for producing color filter, solid state imaging element, image display device and dye polymer using coloring composition
JP6122454B2 (en) Red coloring composition for color filter, colored film, color filter, solid-state imaging device
JP6008891B2 (en) Colored radiation-sensitive composition, colored cured film, color filter, colored pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state imaging device, and liquid crystal display device
JP6170515B2 (en) Green colored composition for color filter, colored film, color filter, solid-state imaging device
KR101796949B1 (en) Red-photosensitive resin composition, cured film, color filter, production method for color filter, solid state imaging element, and image display device
JP6251067B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, method for producing color filter, color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP2015151530A (en) Composite and production method of the same, colored composition, cured film, color filter, production method of color filter, solid state imaging element, and image display device, as well as laminate
WO2016072259A1 (en) Colored curable composition, color filter, pattern formation method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JPWO2017082226A1 (en) Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
WO2016143437A1 (en) Colored composition, method for producing colored composition, color filter, ink jet ink composition and printing ink composition
WO2016103958A1 (en) Colored curable composition, color filter, pattern forming method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
JP6793799B2 (en) Negative curable coloring composition, cured film, color filter, pattern forming method and equipment

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15880086

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20177013445

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2016571779

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 15880086

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1